Hardware Maintenance Manual
ThinkServer TD200x
Machine Types: 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823
Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 279
and the Warranty and Support Information document on the Lenovo® ThinkServer Documentation DVD.
First Edition (July 2009)
© Copyright Lenovo 2009.
Portions © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.
LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and
are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights
to use, reproduction and disclosure.
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered
pursuant a General Services Administration ″GSA″ contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
|
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
|
Contents
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. About this manual
This Hardware Maintenance Manual contains information to help you solve
problems that might occur in your server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come
with the server, error codes and suggested actions, and instructions for replacing
failing components.
Replaceable components are of three types:
|
|
|
v Self-service customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of self-service
CRUs is your responsibility. If Lenovo installs a self-service CRU at your request,
you will be charged for the installation.
|
|
|
v Optional-service customer replaceable unit: You may install an
optional-service CRU yourself or request Lenovo to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for the server.
|
|
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.
The most recent version of this document is available at http://www.lenovo.com/
Before servicing a Lenovo product, be sure to read the Safety Information. See
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty and Support Information document.
Important Safety Information
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing
any of the instructions.
Veuillez lire toutes les consignes de type DANGER et ATTENTION du présent
document avant d’exécuter les instructions.
Lesen Sie unbedingt alle Hinweise vom Typ ″ACHTUNG″ oder ″VORSICHT″ in
dieser Dokumentation, bevor Sie irgendwelche Vorgänge durchführen
Leggere le istruzioni introdotte da ATTENZIONE e PERICOLO presenti nel manuale
prima di eseguire una qualsiasi delle istruzioni
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo neste manual antes de
executar qualquer uma das instruções
Es importante que lea todas las declaraciones de precaución y de peligro de este
manual antes de seguir las instrucciones.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important information about replacing RoHS compliant FRUs
RoHS, The Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Directive (2002/95/EC) is a European Union legal requirement
affecting the global electronics industry. RoHS requirements must be
implemented on Lenovo products placed on the market and sold in the
European Union after June 2006. Products on the market before June 2006
are not required to have RoHS compliant parts. If the parts are not compliant
originally, replacement parts can also be noncompliant, but in all cases, if the
parts are compliant, the replacement parts must also be compliant.
Note: RoHS and non-RoHS FRU part numbers with the same fit and function are
identified with unique FRU part numbers.
Lenovo plans to transition to RoHS compliance well before the implementation date
and expects its suppliers to be ready to support Lenovo’s requirements and
schedule in the EU. Products sold in 2005, will contain some RoHS compliant
FRUs. The following statement pertains to these products and any product Lenovo
produces containing RoHS compliant parts.
RoHS compliant ThinkCentre parts have unique FRU part numbers. Before or after
June, 2006, failed RoHS compliant parts must always be replaced using RoHS
compliant FRUs, so only the FRUs identified as compliant in the system HMM or
direct substitutions for those FRUs can be used.
Products marketed before June 2006
Products marketed after June 2006
Current or original
part
Replacement FRU
Current or original
part
Replacement FRU
Non-RoHS
Non-RoHS
Non-RoHS
RoHS
Can be Non-RoHS
Can be RoHS
Must be RoHS
Must be RoHS
Can sub to RoHS
Must be RoHS
Note: A direct substitution is a part with a different FRU part number that is
automatically shipped by the distribution center at the time of order.
2
ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turkish statement of compliance
The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on
the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (EEE).
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın
“Elektrik ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin
Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)”
direktiflerine uygundur.
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Chapter 1. About this manual
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. Safety information
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.
Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.
Avant d’installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.
Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.
Inspecting for unsafe conditions
Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
a Lenovo product that you are working on. Each Lenovo product, as it was
designed and manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service
technicians from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items.
Use good judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by
non-Lenovo alterations or attachment of non-Lenovo features or options that are not
addressed in this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine
how serious the hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you
work on the product.
Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.
To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-Lenovo alterations. Use good judgment as to the
safety of any non-Lenovo alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment
Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, power surges, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.
6
ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.
Chapter 2. Safety information
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety statements
Important:
Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.
For example, if a caution statement is labeled "Statement 1," translations for that
caution statement are in the Safety Information document under "Statement 1."
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the
server or optional device before you install the device.
Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified
telecommunication line cord.
8
ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement 1:
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is
hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.
To Connect:
To Disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
5. Turn device ON.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
Chapter 2. Safety information
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement 2:
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a type battery recommended by
the manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery,
replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer.
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or
disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
10 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement 3:
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.
Class 1 Laser Product
Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1
Chapter 2. Safety information 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement 4:
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
Statement 5:
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.
2
1
12 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statement 8:
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
Statement 26:
CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.
Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system
whose maximum phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault
condition.
Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace devices
according to Clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.
Chapter 2. Safety information 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. General information
This chapter provides general information that applies to all machine types
supported by this publication.
Features and technologies
The TD200x server offers the following features and technologies:
v UEFI-compliant server firmware
The server firmware offers several features, including Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) 2.1 compliance, enhanced RAS capabilities, and BIOS
compatibility support. UEFI replaces the basic input/output system (BIOS) and
defines a standard interface between the operating system, platform firmware,
and external devices. UEFI-compliant servers are capable of starting
UEFI-compliant operating systems, BIOS-based operating systems, and
BIOS-based adapters as well as UEFI-compliant adapters.
Note: The server does not support DOS.
v Integrated Management Module
The integrated management module (IMM) combines service processor
functions, video controller, and remote presence function in a single chip. The
IMM provides advanced service-processor control, monitoring, and alerting
function. If an environmental condition exceeds a threshold or if a system
component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you diagnose the problem, records
the error in the event log, and alerts you to the problem. The IMM also provides
a virtual presence capability for remote server management capabilities. The IMM
provides remote server management through industry-standard interfaces:
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3
– Common Information Model (CIM)
– Web browser
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,
regardless of the system state
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
– Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a
remote client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that
are available for use by the server
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server
as a virtual drive
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the
IMM restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang
condition. A system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in
determining the cause of the hang condition.
v Preboot diagnostics programs
The preboot diagnostics programs are stored on the integrated USB memory. It
collects and analyzes system information to aid in diagnosing server problems.
The diagnostics programs collect the following information about the server:
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– System configuration
– Network interfaces and settings
– Installed hardware
– EasyLED diagnostics status
– Service processor status and configuration
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI (formerly BIOS) configuration
– Hard disk drive health
– RAID controller configuration
– Event logs for service processors
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all
collected logs. The information is collected into a file that you can send to
Lenovo service and support. Additionally, you can view the information locally
through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log to a removable
media and view the log from a Web browser.
For additional information about preboot diagnostics, see “Running the diagnostic
v EasyStartup DVD
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program guides you through the configuration of
the hardware, the RAID controller, and the installation of the operating system
and device drivers.
v EasyManage DVD
The ThinkServer EasyManage program helps you manage and administer your
servers and clients through remote problem notification as well as monitoring and
alerting.
v Integrated network support
The server comes with one integrated Broadcom 5709C series Gigabit Ethernet
controller, which supports connection to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps
network. For more information, see “Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) 2.0
IPMI 2.0 support providing secure remote power-on/power-off and several
standard alerts for components such as fans, voltage, and temperature.
v Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capability
The server supports up to eight or 16 (depending on your model) 2.5-inch
hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays. With the hot-swap feature, you
can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives without turning off the server.
v Large system-memory capacity
The server supports up to 64 GB of system memory. The memory controller
supports error correcting code (ECC) for up to 16 single-sided industry-standard
third-generation double-data-rate 3 (DDR3) 800, 1066, and 1333, 240-pin,
registered, synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) dual inline
memory modules (DIMMs).
v EasyLED diagnostics
EasyLED diagnostics provides LEDs to help you diagnose problems. For more
information, see “EasyLED diagnostics panel” on page 129.
v Memory mirroring
Memory mirroring improves the availability of memory by writing information to
the main memory and redundant locations in a mirrored pair of DIMMs.
v PCI-32 adapter capabilities
16 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The server has one slot for a PCI-32 adapter.
v PCI Express x8 adapter capabilities
The server has five slots for PCI Express x8 adapters. Three of these slots
accept x8 adapters, but the adapters will operate as x4 adapters.
v PCI Express x16 adapter capabilities
The server has one slot for PCI Express x16 adapter, which will operate as an x8
adapter.
v Redundant cooling and power capabilities
The server supports up to two 920-watt hot-swap power supplies. If the server
came with only one power supply, you can install an additional power supply with
three redundant hot-swap cooling fans to add redundant power and cooling
capabilities. If the maximum load on the server is less than 920 watts and a
problem occurs with one of the power supplies, the other power supply can meet
the power requirements. The redundant cooling of the fans enables continued
operation if one of the fans fails.
v RAID support
The server supports an internal RAID SAS Controller, which is required for you to
use the hot-swap hard disk drives and to create redundant array of independent
disks (RAID) configurations.
v Symmetric multiprocessing (SMP)
The server supports up to two Intel® Xeon® quad-core microprocessors. If the
server comes with only one microprocessor, you can install an additional
microprocessor to enhance performance and provide SMP capability.
v Systems-management capabilities
The server contains an Integrated Management Module (IMM) which enables you
to manage the functions of the server locally and remotely and provides remote
presence and blue-screen capture capability. The IMM also provides system
monitoring and event recording.
v TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) support
The Ethernet controllers in the server support TOE, which is a technology that
offloads the TCP/IP flow from the microprocessors and I/O subsystem to increase
the speed of the TCP/IP flow. When an operating system that supports TOE is
running on the server and TOE is enabled, the server supports TOE operation.
See the operating-system documentation for information about enabling TOE.
Note: As of the date of this document, the Linux® operating system does not
support TOE.
Specifications
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the
server. Depending on the server model, some features might not be available, or
some specifications might not apply.
Chapter 3. General information 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor:
Hot-swap fans:
RAID controllers:
v
Intel Xeon dual-core or quad-core with
integrated memory controller and Quick Path
Interconnect (QPI) architecture
Designed for LGA 1366 socket
Scalable up to four cores
32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data cache,
and 8 MB cache that is shared among the
cores
Support for up to two microprocessors, second
microprocessor with pluggable VRM
Support for Intel Extended Memory 64
Technology (EM64T)
v
Three (standard)
Upgradeable to six fans (for redundant
cooling)
v
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA Controller that
supports RAID levels 0, 1, 1E (standard)
v
v
Upgradeable to ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA
Controller, which supports RAID levels 0, 1, 5,
6, 10
v
v
v
Note: To upgrade to redundant cooling, install
the redundant power and cooling option kit. Kit
includes one 920-watt hot-swap power-supply
and three hot-swap fans.
v
Upgradeable to ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA
Controller, which supports RAID levels 0, 1, 5,
6, 10
v
v
Size:
v
Tower
Acoustical noise emissions:
v
v
–
–
–
–
Height: 440 mm (17.3 inches)
Depth: 767 mm (30.2 inches)
Width: 218 mm (8.6 inches)
Weight: approximately 38 kg (84 lb.) when
fully configured or 20 kg (42 lb.) minimum
Sound power, idle: 5.5 bel declared
Sound power, operating: 6.0 bel declared
Note: Use the Setup Utility to determine the type
and speed of the microprocessors. For a list of
supported microprocessors, see
http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click
Options.
Environment:
v
Air temperature:
–
–
Server on: 10° to 35° C (50.0° to 95.0° F);
altitude: 0 to 914.4 m (3000 ft.)
Server off: -40° to 60° C (-40.0° to 140.4° F);
maximum altitude: 2133.6 m (7000 ft.)
Integrated functions:
v
Integrated management module (IMM), which
provides service processor control and
monitoring functions, video controller, remote
keyboard, video, mouse, and remote hard
disk drive capabilities
Memory:
v
16 DIMM connectors (eight per
microprocessor)
Minimum: 2 GB DIMM per microprocessor
Maximum: 64 GB
Type: Registered ECC DDR3 800, 1066, and
1333 MHz DIMMs only
Sizes: 1 GB single-rank, 2 GB single-rank or
dual-rank, 4 GB dual-rank (PC3-10600R-999)
v
Humidity:
–
–
Server on: 8% to 80%
Server off: 8% to 80%
v
v
v
v
Dedicated or shared management network
connections
Heat output:
v
v
Six-port Serial ATA (SATA) controller
Serial over LAN (SOL) and serial redirection
over Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH)
Support for remote management presence
One systems-management RJ-45 for
connection to a dedicated
systems-management network
EasyLED diagnostics
Six Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports
standard (v2.0 supporting v1.1)
v
Approximate heat output in British thermal units
(Btu) per hour:
v
v
v
Minimum configuration: 2013 Btu per hour (590
watts)
Maximum configuration: 3610 Btu per hour
(1058 watts)
Drives:
v
SATA:
v
–
–
–
DVD (standard)
DVD/CD-RW (optional)
Maximum of two devices can be installed
v
v
Electrical input:
v
v
v
v
Diskette (optional): External USB 1.44 MB
Supported hard disk drives:
Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz) required
Input voltage low range:
–
–
Four on rear of server
Two on front of server
–
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
–
–
Minimum: 100 V ac
Maximum: 127 V ac
v
v
One internal USB tape connector
One Broadcom dual-port 10/100/1000
Ethernet controller with Wake on LAN
support and TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE)
support
Expansion bays:
v
v
v
v
Input voltage high range:
16 hot-swap SAS 2.5-inch bays
Three half-high 5.25-inch bays (one DVD drive
installed)
Note: Full-high devices such as an optional
tape drive will occupy two half-high
5.25-inch bays.
–
–
Minimum: 200 V ac
Maximum: 240 V ac
Approximate input kilovolt-amperes (kVA):
v
One serial connector, shared with the IMM
–
–
Minimum: 0.60 kVA
Maximum: 1.10 kVA
Note: In messages and documentation, the
term service processor refers to the integrated
management module (IMM).
Notes:
PCI and PCI-X expansion slots:
v
1. Power consumption and heat output vary
depending on the number and type of optional
features that are installed and the
power-management optional features that are
in use.
Six PCI expansion slots on system board
Video controller:
–
–
–
–
Two PCI Express x8 (x4 link)
Two PCI Express x8 (x8 link)
One PCI Express x16 (x8 link)
One PCI 32-bit
v
v
v
Matrox G200 video on system board
Compatible with SVGA and VGA
8 MB DDR2 SDRAM video memory
Note: Maximum video resolution 1600 x
1200 at 85 MHz
2. These levels were measured in controlled
acoustical environments according to the
procedures that are specified by the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and
ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with
ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a
given location might exceed the average stated
values because of room reflections and other
nearby noise sources. The declared
v
One PCI Express x8 (x4 link) on the extender
card
Power supply:
Note: To upgrade to two 920-watt hot-swap
power supplies, install the redundant power and
cooling option kit. Kit includes one hot-swap
920-watt power-supply and three hot-swap fans.
v
Standard: One 920-watt 110 V or 240 V ac
input dual-rated power supply
Upgradeable to two 920-watt hot-swap power
supplies
sound-power levels indicate an upper limit,
below which a large number of computers will
operate.
v
Software
Lenovo provides software to help get your server up and running.
18 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EasyStartup
EasyManage
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of your RAID
controller and installing supported Microsoft® Windows® and Linux operating
systems and device drivers on your server. The EasyStartup program is provided
with your server on DVD. The DVD is self starting (bootable). The user guide for the
EasyStartup program is on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the program
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server provides centralized hardware and
software inventory management and secure automated system management
through a centralized console. The ThinkServer EasyManage Agent enables other
clients on the network to be managed by the centralized console. The ThinkServer
EasyManage Core Server is supported on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (32-bit) products. The ThinkServer EasyManage
Agent is supported on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE operating
systems.
Chapter 3. General information 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. General Checkout
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this Hardware Maintenance Manual and on the
Lenovo Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software
also contains troubleshooting information.
Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the server.
About the checkout procedure
Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major
components of the server, such as the system board, Ethernet controller,
keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives. You can
also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a
problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than
one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the first error
message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run
the diagnostic programs.
|
|
|
|
Exception: If multiple error codes or EasyLED diagnostics LEDs indicate a
microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
sharing external storage devices).
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.
Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
codes” on page 30. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed,
Performing the checkout procedure
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Turn off the server and all external devices.
b. Check all cables and power cords.
|
|
|
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at
Options Guide.pdf.
d. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
e. Turn on all external devices.
g. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel (see
flashing, check the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs (see “EasyLED diagnostics”
h. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST
v Successful completion of startup, indicated by a readable display of the
operating-system desktop
3. Are there readable instructions on the main menu?
necessary, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 124.
– If the diagnostic programs were completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 124.
Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server:
1. Determine what has changed.
22 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced,
or updated before the problem occurred:
v Lenovo ThinkServer Server Firmware (server firmware)
v Device drivers
v Firmware
v Hardware components
v Software
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem
occurred.
2. Collect data.
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software
problems.
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.
information about error codes.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for
the software or operating system for information about a specific error
code. See the manufacturer's Web site for documentation.
information about EasyLED diagnostics LEDs that are lit.
information about system-board LEDs that are lit.
b. Collect system data.
Run Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to collect information about the
hardware, firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information
available when you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service
provider. For instructions for running the DSA program, see “Running the
If you have to download the latest version of DSA , complete the following
steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
2) Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.
3) Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
4) From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
5) Click Downloads and drivers and look at the list for the Preboot DSA
CD image.
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they
are most likely to solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in
which they are presented:
a. Check for and apply code updates.
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually
caused by Lenovo ThinkServer Server Firmware (server firmware), system
firmware, device firmware, or device drivers that are not at the latest levels.
Chapter 4. General Checkout 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
To display a list of available updates for your server, complete the
following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this
document.
b) Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or
select Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.
c) Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
d) From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
e) Click System TD200x to display the list of downloadable files for the
server.
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work
when you enable it; if you make an incorrect change to the server
configuration, a system function that has been enabled can stop working.
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.
the installed operating system, optional devices, and software levels. If
any hardware or software component is not supported, uninstall it to
determine whether it is causing the problem. You must remove
nonsupported hardware before you contact Lenovo or an approved
warranty service provider for support.
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are
installed and configured correctly.
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal
cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to solve the
problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. For information about
performing the checkout procedure, see “Checkout procedure” on page
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a
RAID hard disk drive is marked offline in the RAID array), see the
documentation for the associated controller and management or
controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as
RAID and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or Lenovo software or devices,
complete the following steps.
24 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this
document.
b) Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or
select Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.
c) Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
d) From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
e) Under Support & downloads, click Documentation, Install, and
Use to search for related documentation.
|
c. Check for troubleshooting procedures, and hints and tips.
|
|
|
Troubleshooting procedures, and hints and tips document known problems
and suggested solutions. To search for troubleshooting procedures, and
hints and tips, complete the following steps.
|
|
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
|
|
|
2) Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.
|
|
|
3) Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
4) From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
5) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
|
|
6) Select the troubleshooting procedure or hints and tips that applies to
your problem:
|
|
v Troubleshooting procedures are under Diagnostic.
v Hints and tips are under Troubleshoot.
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause
unpredictable results. Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in
a system or operating-system log. For more information, see
errors are also indicated by EasyLED diagnostics LEDs.
A single problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not
diagnose the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible.
If the problem remains, contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service
provider for assistance with additional problem determination and possible
hardware replacement. Be prepared to provide information about any error
codes and collected data.
Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by Lenovo. After you have
verified that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations
are valid, and no EasyLED diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware
component failure, contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider for
assistance. Be prepared to provide information about any error codes and collected
data and the problem determination procedures that you have used.
Chapter 4. General Checkout 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the server.
If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this
more information.
Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v POST error messages
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test
completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST error codes” on page 30
for more information.
v Event logs
For information about the POST event log, the system-event log, the integrated
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
v EasyLED diagnostics
|
|
Use the EasyLED diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See “EasyLED
diagnostics” on page 76 for more information.
v Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server. See “Diagnostic programs, messages, and error
codes” on page 90 for more information.
Event logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the POST event log
through the Setup utility.
v System-event log: This log contains all IMM, POST, and system management
interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the system-event log through the Setup
utility and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the IPMI
event log).
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically save and then clear
the system-event log through the Setup utility when the IMM logs an event that
indicates that the log is more than 75% full. When you are troubleshooting, you
might have to save and then clear the system-event log to make the most recent
events available for analysis.
Messages are listed on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected
message are displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry
to the next, use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some IMM sensors cause assertion events to be logged when their setpoints are
reached. When a setpoint condition no longer exists, a corresponding
deassertion event is logged. However, not all events are assertion-type events.
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface and through the
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program,
and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI
event log), the IMM event log (as the ASM event log), and the operating-system
event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA program.
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility
To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.
v To view the system-event log, select System Event Log.
Viewing event logs without restarting the server
If the server is not hung, methods are available for you to view one or more event
logs without having to restart the server.
|
|
|
|
You can use the DSA Preboot to view the system event log (as the IPMI event log),
the IMM event log (as the ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You must restart
the server to use DSA Preboot to view those logs. To install a DSA Preboot CD
image, complete the following steps:
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers
and Storage from the Select your product list.
3. Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
4. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
5. Click Downloads and drivers and look at the list for the Preboot DSA CD
image.
You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the integrated
management module (IMM) Web interface.
The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first two conditions generally do not
require that you restart the server.
28 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 2. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition
Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a Use any of the following methods:
network.
v Run Portable or Installable DSA to view
the event logs or create an output file that
you can send to Lenovo service and
support.
v Type the IP address of the IMM and go to
the Event Log page.
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event
to a network.
log.
The server is hung.
v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot
and view the event logs.
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to
start DSA Preboot and view the event
logs.
v Alternatively, you can restart the server
and press F1 to start the Setup utility and
view the POST event log or system-event
log. For more information, see “Viewing
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST error codes
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when
you are prompted, for POST to run.
If POST is completed without detecting any problems, the server startup is
completed.
If POST detects a problem, an error message is sent to the POST event log.
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
0010002
Description
Action
Microprocessor not supported
1. Reseat the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2 (if one is installed)
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the
server. If the error is corrected, microprocessor 1
is bad and must be replaced.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
0011000
Invalid microprocessor type
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is
lit) with a supported type.
30 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
0011002
Microprocessor mismatch
1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
0011004
Microprocessor failed BIST
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat
microprocessor 2.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
001100A
0050001
Microcode update failed
DIMM disabled
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
microprocessor.
1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
0051003
Uncorrectable DIMM error
1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
0051006
DIMM mismatch detected
Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
0051009
No memory detected
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
005100A
No usable memory detected
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory
connectors.
0058001
0058007
PFA threshold exceeded
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test.
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a
lit LED on the system board.
DIMM population is unsupported
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those
that are identified, replace it with an identical pair
of known good DIMMs, and then restart the
server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures
continue, go to step 4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to
their original connectors, restarting the server
after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the
DIMMs in the failed pair with identical known
good DIMMs, restarting the server after each
DIMM is installed. Replace the failed DIMM.
Repeat this step until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058008
DIMM failed memory test
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
00580A1
Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode
1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
32 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
00580A4
Memory population changed
Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or
changed.
00580A5
0068002
Mirror failover complete
CMOS battery cleared
Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure
events.
1. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011000
PCI-X PERR
1. Check the extender card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011001
PCI-X SERR
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
2018001
PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected
error
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove both adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2018002
Option ROM resource allocation failure
Informational message that some devices might not
be initialized.
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in
the PCI slots to change the load order of the
optional-device ROM code.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Start Options, and
change the boot priority to change the load order
of the optional-device ROM code.
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other
resources, if their functions are not being used, to
make more space available. Select Devices and
I/O Ports to disable any of the integrated devices.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Each adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3xx0007 (xx
can be 00 - 19)
Firmware fault detected, system halted
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the
default values.
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.
3038003
3048005
Firmware corrupted
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
server firmware.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Booted secondary (backup) server firmware Information only. The backup switch was used to boot
image the secondary bank.
34 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
3048006
Booted secondary (backup) server firmware
image because of ABR
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
primary server firmware settings.
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power
source.
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, and
then turn on the server.
305000A
RTC date/time is incorrect
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup
utility, and then restart the server.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058001
System configuration invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in
the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be reseated by a trained service technician
only)
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be replaced by a trained service technician
only)
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
3058004
Three boot failures
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new
settings or newly installed devices.
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable
power source.
|
|
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the
ThinkServer ready Web site.
4. Make sure that the operating system is not
corrupted.
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and
then restart the server.
3108007
3138002
System configuration restored to default
settings
Information only. This is message is usually
associated with the CMOS battery clear event.
Boot configuration error
1. Remove any recent configuration changes that
you made in the Setup utility.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3808000
IMM communication failure
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,
and then reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware.
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3808002
3808003
3808004
Error updating system configuration to IMM
1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the firmware.
Error retrieving system configuration from
IMM
1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware.
IMM system event log full
v When out-of-band, use the IMM Web interface or
IPMItool to clear the logs from the operating
system.
v When using the local console:
1. Run the Setup utility.
2. Select System Event Logs.
3. Select Clear System Event Log.
4. Restart the server.
36 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code
Description
Action
3818001
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
update failed
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818002
3818003
3818004
3818005
3818006
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
update aborted
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
flash lock failed
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
system error
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Current Bank Core Root of Trust
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature
invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature
invalid
1. Switch the firmware bank to the backup bank.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Switch the bank back to the current bank.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818007
CRTM update capsule signature invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-event log
The system-event log contains messages of three types:
Information
Information messages do not require action; they record significant
system-level events, such as when the server is started.
Warning
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature
is exceeded.
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as
when a fan is not detected.
Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of
the message (POST or the IMM).
Integrated management module error messages
The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. For more information about IMM, see the IMM
User’s Guide on the Web.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Message
Severity
Description
Action
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error
high (upper critical) has asserted.
An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
Reduce the ambient temperature.
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error
high (upper non-recoverable) has
asserted.
An upper nonrecoverable
sensor going high has
asserted.
Reduce the ambient temperature.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
Error
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
low has asserted.
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going
high (upper critical) has asserted.
Error
An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going low Error
(lower critical) has asserted.
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
low has asserted.
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going high Error
(upper critical) has asserted.
An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 12V going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
Error
A lower critical sensor going Check the power-supply LED on
low has asserted.
the EasyLED panel (see
Numeric sensor Planar 12V going
high (upper critical) has asserted.
Error
An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
Check the power-supply LED on
the EasyLED panel (see
38 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
Error
A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.
low has asserted.
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
(n = fan number)
Error
A lower critical sensor going
low has asserted.
1. Reseat the failing fan n, which
is indicated by a lit LED on
the fan.
2. Replace the failing fan.
(n = fan number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has
Failed with IERR.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error
A processor failed - IERR
condition has occurred.
1. Make sure that the latest
levels of firmware and device
drivers are installed for all
adapters and standard
devices, such as Ethernet,
SCSI, and SAS.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Run the DSA program for the
hard disk drives and other I/O
devices.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
An Over-Temperature Condition has Error
been detected on the Processor CPU
nStatus.
An overtemperature
condition has occurred for
microprocessor n.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
(n = microprocessor number)
(n = microprocessor number)
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error
A processor failed -
FRB1/BIST condition has
occurred.
1. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
on page 220 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has a
Configuration Mismatch.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error
A processor configuration
mismatch has occurred.
1. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
on page 220 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.
40 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU
complex error for Processor CPU
nStatus has asserted.
Error
An SMBIOS uncorrectable
CPU complex error has
asserted.
1. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
(n = microprocessor number)
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see “Installing a
on page 220 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
(n = microprocessor number)
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to non-recoverable from
a less severe state.
Error
Error
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state from a
less severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
(n = microprocessor number)
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to critical from a
non-recoverable state.
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
(n = microprocessor number)
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = microprocessor number)
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
42 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A diagnostic interrupt has occurred
on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
An operator information
panel NMI/diagnostic
interrupt has occurred.
If the NMI button on the system
board has not been pressed,
complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the NMI
button is not pressed.
2. Replace the operator
information panel cable.
3. Replace the operator
information panel.
A bus timeout has occurred on
system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
A bus timeout has occurred.
1. Remove the adapter from the
PCI slot that is indicated by a
lit LED.
2. Replace the extender card.
3. Remove all PCI adapters.
4. (Trained service technicians
only) Replace the system
board.
A software NMI has occurred on
system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
Error
A software NMI has
occurred.
1. Check the device driver.
2. Reinstall the device driver.
The System %1 encountered a
POST Error.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
A POST error has occurred.
(Sensor = ABR Status)
1. Recover the server firmware
from the backup page (see
2. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The System %1 encountered a
POST Error.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
A POST error has occurred.
(Sensor = Firmware Error)
1. Update the server firmware
on the primary page.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int PCI)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.
3. Remove the adapter from the
indicated PCI slot.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
44 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int CPU)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the microprocessor
error LEDs.
3. Remove the failing
microprocessor from the
system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the two
microprocessors are
matching.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int DIM)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.
3. Remove the failing DIMM
from the system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the installed
DIMMs are supported and
configured correctly.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Sys Board Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check for an error LED on
the system board.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
The Power Supply (Power Supply: n) Error
has Failed.
(n = power supply number)
Power supply nhas failed.
(n = power supply number)
1. If the power-on LED is lit,
complete the following steps:
a. Reduce the server to the
minimum configuration.
b. Reinstall the components
one at a time, restarting
the server each time.
c. If the error recurs, replace
the component that you
just reinstalled.
2. Reseat power supply n.
3. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n Fan Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that there are no
obstructions, such as bundled
cables, to the airflow from the
power-supply fan.
(n = power supply number)
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
46 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail A Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
1. Reinstall the
microprocessor in socket 1
and restart the server.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail B Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
2.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail C Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error
Error
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives,
hard disk drive backplanes,
and DIMMs in connectors 1
through 8.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail D Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the optical drive and
the DIMMs in connectors 9
through 16.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall the microprocessor
in socket 1 and restart the
server.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the failing
microprocessor.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail E Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the optical
drive and the PCI adapter.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
48 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail F Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives
and the hard disk drive
backplanes.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor PS n Therm Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that there are no
obstructions, such as bundled
cables, to the airflow from the
power-supply fan.
(n = power supply number)
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V OV Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Check the power-supply LED
on the EasyLED panel (see
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V UV Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Check the power-supply LED
on the EasyLED panel (see
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor PSn 12V OC Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Check the power-supply LED
on the EasyLED panel (see
2. Remove the power supplies.
3. Replace power supply n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n VCO Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
Error
A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Check the power-supply LED
on the EasyLED panel (see
2. Replace the failing power
supply.
(n = power supply number)
Redundancy Power Unit has been
reduced.
Error
Error
Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Check the LEDs for both
power supplies.
2. Follow the actions in
Redundancy Cooling Zone 1 has
been reduced.
Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Make sure that the connector
on fan 1 and fan 4 (if
installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
Redundancy Cooling Zone 2 has
been reduced.
Error
Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Make sure that the connector
on fan 2 and fan 5 (if
installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
50 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Redundancy Cooling Zone 3 has
been reduced.
Error
Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Make sure that the connector
on fan 3 and fan 6 (if
installed) is not damaged.
2. Make sure that the fan
connectors on the system
board are not damaged.
3. Make sure that the fan cage
is correctly installed.
4. Reseat the fan.
5. Replace the fan.
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned
to critical from a less severe state.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Check the hard disk drive
LEDs.
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for
which the status LED is lit.
3. Replace the defective hard
disk drive.
The Drive n Status has been
removed from unit Drive 0 Status.
(n = hard disk drive number)
Error
Error
A drive has been removed.
Reseat hard disk drive n.
(n = hard disk drive number)
The Drive n Status has been
disabled due to a detected fault.
(n = hard disk drive number)
A drive has been disabled
because of a fault.
1. Run the hard disk drive
diagnostic test on drive n.
2. Reseat the following
components:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
3. Replace the following
components one at a time, in
the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
c. Hard disk drive backplane
(n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 is in critical condition.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
Error
An array is in Critical state.
(Sensor = Drive n Status)
(n = hard disk drive number)
Replace the hard disk drive that
is indicated by a lit status LED.
Array %1 has failed.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
An array is in Failed state.
(Sensor = Drive n Status)
(n = hard disk drive number)
Replace the hard disk drive that
is indicated by a lit status LED.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem All DIMMs.
A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem All DIMMs.
Error
The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for All DIMMs on Memory Subsystem
All DIMMs.
Error
A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on
Memory Subsystem One of the
DIMMs.
A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
52 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM One of the DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.
Error
The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for One of the DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.
Error
A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error
for DIMM n Status on Memory
Subsystem DIMM n Status.
A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
(n = DIMM number)
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM nStatus on Memory
Subsystem DIMMnStatus.
(n = DIMM number)
Error
The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for DIMM nStatus on Memory
Subsystem DIMM nStatus.
(n = DIMM number)
Error
A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Sensor DIMM n Temp has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error
A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffles are in
place and correctly installed,
and that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
(n = DIMM number)
2. If a fan has failed, complete
the action for a fan failure.
3. Replace DIMM n.
(n = DIMM number)
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
A PCI PERR has occurred.
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =
PCI slot number)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
54 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
A PCI SERR has occurred.
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =
PCI slot number)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
A PCI PERR has occurred.
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and riser card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
A PCI SERR has occurred.
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Fault in slot System board on system Error
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
56 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has Error
been reduced.
Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Check the system-event log
for DIMM failure events
(uncorrectable or PFA) and
correct the failures.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the
Setup utility.
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info
An IMM network has
No action; information only.
completed initialization.
Certificate Authority %1 has detected Error
a %2 Certificate Error.
(%1 = Lenovo_CertificateAuthority.
CADistinguishedName;
%2 = CIM_PublicKeyCertificate.
ElementName)
A problem has occurred with
the SSL Server, SSL Client,
or SSL Trusted CA certificate
that has been imported into
the IMM. The imported
certificate must contain a
public key that corresponds
to the key pair that was
previously generated by the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
1. Make sure that the certificate
that you are importing is
correct.
2. Try importing the certificate
again.
Request link.
Ethernet Data Rate modified from %1 Info
to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%3 = user ID)
A user has modified the
Ethernet port data rate.
No action; information only.
No action; information only.
No action; information only.
Ethernet Duplex setting modified
from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%3 = user ID)
Info
Info
A user has modified the
Ethernet port duplex setting.
Ethernet MTU setting modified from
%1 to %2 by user %3.
A user has modified the
Ethernet port MTU setting.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit; %3
= user ID)
Ethernet Duplex setting modified
from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
Info
Info
A user has modified the
Ethernet port MAC address
setting.
No action; information only.
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2.
(%1 =
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState;
%2 = user ID)
A user has enabled or
disabled the Ethernet
interface.
No action; information only.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Hostname set to %1 by user %2.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname;
Info
A user has modified the host No action; information only.
name of the IMM.
%2 = user ID)
IP address of network interface
modified from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.IPAddress;
Info
A user has modified the IP
address of the IMM.
No action; information only.
No action; information only.
%3 = user ID)
IP subnet mask of network interface Info
modified from %1 to %2 by user
%3s.
A user has modified the IP
subnet mask of the IMM.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.SubnetMask;
%3 = user ID)
IP address of default gateway
modified from %1 to %2 by user
%3s.
Info
A user has modified the
default gateway IP address
of the IMM.
No action; information only.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
GatewayIPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress;
%3 = user ID)
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2.
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 =
user ID)
Info
Info
A user has enabled or
disabled an OS Watchdog.
No action; information only.
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address
assigned.
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
A DHCP server has failed to
assign an IP address to the
IMM.
1. Make sure that the network
cable is connected.
2. Make sure that there is a
DHCP server on the network
that can assign an IP address
to the IMM.
Remote Login Successful. Login ID: Info
%1 from %2 at IP address %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
A user has successfully
logged in to the IMM.
No action; information only.
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
58 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user Info
%3.
A user has used the IMM to No action; information only.
perform a power function on
(%1 = Power Up, Power Down,
Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =
Lenovo_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %3 = user ID)
the server.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login
failures from WEB client at IP
address %3.
Error
A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
from a Web browser and has
2. Have the system
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
been prevented from logging
administrator reset the login
in for the lockout period.
ID or password.
Security: Login ID: '%1' had %2 login Error
failures from CLI at %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
from the command-line
2. Have the system
interface and has been
administrator reset the login
prevented from logging in for
ID or password.
the lockout period.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error
userid or password received. Userid
is '%1' from WEB browser at IP
address %2.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
A user has attempted to log
1. Make sure that the correct
in from a Web browser by
login ID and password are
using an invalid login ID or
being used.
password.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error
userid or password received. Userid
is '%1' from TELNET client at IP
address %2.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
A user has attempted to log
1. Make sure that the correct
in from a Telnet session by
login ID and password are
using an invalid login ID or
being used.
password.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 cleared by user %2.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %2 = user ID)
Info
A user has cleared the IMM No action; information only.
event log.
IMM reset was initiated by user %1. Info
(%1 = user ID)
A user has initiated a reset
of the IMM.
No action; information only.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2, Info
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5,
DNS1@=%6.
The DHCP server has
assigned an IMM IP address
and configuration.
No action; information only.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
DomainName; %3 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address; %4 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1,
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
Info
An IMM IP address and
configuration have been
assigned using client data.
No action; information only.
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
IPv4Address; %3 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
SubnetMask; %4 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress)
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no
longer active.
Info
Info
Info
The IMM Ethernet interface
has been disabled.
No action; information only.
No action; information only.
No action; information only.
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now
active.
The IMM Ethernet interface
has been enabled.
DHCP setting changed to by user
%1.
A user has changed the
DHCP mode.
(%1 = user ID)
IMM: Configuration %1 restored from Info
a configuration file by user %2.
A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.
configuration by importing a
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData.
configuration file.
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture
Occurred.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog)
Error
An operating-system error
has occurred, and the
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
screen capture was
2. Make sure that the IMM
successful.
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
60 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture
Screen.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog)
Error
An operating-system error
has occurred, and the
screen capture failed.
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
6. Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
Running the backup IMM main
application.
Error
The IMM has resorted to
running the backup main
application.
Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
Please ensure that the IMM is
flashed with the correct firmware. The
IMM is unable to match its firmware
to the server.
Error
The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a
the installed IMM firmware
version.
version that the server supports.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
IMM reset was caused by restoring
default values.
Info
Info
The IMM has been reset
because a user has restored
the configuration to its
default settings.
No action; information only.
IMM clock has been set from NTP
server %1.
The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.
to the date and time that is
(%1 =
provided by the Network
Lenovo_NTPService.ElementName)
Time Protocol server.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
SSL data in the IMM configuration
data is invalid. Clearing configuration
data region and disabling SSL+H25.
Error
There is a problem with the
certificate that has been
imported into the IMM. The
imported certificate must
contain a public key that
corresponds to the key pair
that was previously
1. Make sure that the certificate
that you are importing is
correct.
2. Try to import the certificate
again.
generated through the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for Info
user %3.
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.
ElementName;
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
A user has successfully
updated one of the following
firmware components:
No action; information only.
v IMM main application
v IMM boot ROM
v Server firmware
v Diagnostics
v Integrated service
processor
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user
%3.
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.
ElementName;
Info
An attempt to update a
firmware component from
the interface and IP address
has failed.
Try to update the firmware again.
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 is 75% full.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Info
Info
The IMM event log is 75%
full. When the log is full,
older log entries are
To avoid losing older log entries,
save the log as a text file and
clear the log.
replaced by newer ones.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 is 100% full.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
The IMM event log is full.
When the log is full, older
log entries are replaced by
newer ones.
To avoid losing older log entries,
save the log as a text file and
clear the log.
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer expired Error
for %2.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or
Loader Watchdog)
A Platform Watchdog Timer
Expired event has occurred.
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1.
(%1 = user ID)
Info
A user has generated a test No action; information only.
alert from the IMM.
62 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login
failures from an SSH client at IP
address %3.
Error
A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
from SSH and has been
prevented from logging in for
the lockout period.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.
If you cannot find a problem in these tables, see “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 90 for information about testing the server.
|
|
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not
working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting tables:
|
|
1. Check the operator information panel and the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs (see
|
|
|
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.
DVD drive problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The DVD drive is not
recognized.
1. Make sure that:
v The SATA channel to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The signal cable and connector are not damaged and the connector pins are
not bent.
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive cables
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive and cables
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
A DVD is not working correctly.
1. Clean the DVD.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.
64 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The DVD drive tray is not
working.
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.
General problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar
problem has occurred.
trained service technician.
Hard disk drive problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
Not all drives are recognized by Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk
the hard disk drive diagnostic
tests.
drive diagnostic tests again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the
drive that you removed with a new one.
The server stops responding
during the hard disk drive
diagnostic test.
Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped
responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test
runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.
A hard disk drive was not
detected while the operating
system was being started.
Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic
tests again.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
A hard disk drive passes the
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test, but
the problem remains.
Note: This test is not available on servers that have RAID arrays or servers that
have SATA hard disk drives.
Intermittent problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
A problem occurs only
occasionally and is difficult to
diagnose.
1. Make sure that:
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
66 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
All or some keys on the
keyboard do not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
|
|
Server Options Guide.pdf for keyboard compatibility.
3. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup utility and enable keyboardless
operation to prevent the 301 POST error message from being displayed during
startup.
4. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
The mouse or pointing device
does not work.
|
1. Make sure that:
|
|
|
v The mouse or pointing device is compatible with the server. See
Options Guide.pdf.
|
|
|
|
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse is enabled in the Setup utility.
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The amount of system memory
that is displayed is less than the
amount of installed physical
memory.
1. Make sure that:
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel or on the DIMM.
v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the
Setup utility.
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank
might have been manually disabled.
2. Check the POST event log for DIMM error messages:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a system-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup utility and
enable the DIMM.
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the
minimum memory configuration (two 512 MB DIMMs; see the information about
the minimum required configuration on page “Solving undetermined problems”
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair are
matching.
6. Reseat the DIMMs.
the server each time.
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a
branch are identified as failing.
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
2. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMMs with identical known good DIMMs; then,
restart the server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all
identified pairs are replaced, go to step4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in the
failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after you
tested all removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
68 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microprocessor problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The server emits a continuous
beep during POST, indicating
that the startup (boot)
microprocessor is not working
correctly.
1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs (see
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the
microprocessors match in speed and cache size.
3. (Trained service technician only) Reseat microprocessor 1
4. (Trained service technician only) If there is no indication of which
microprocessor has failed, isolate the error by testing with one microprocessor
at a time.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor 2
b. VRM 2
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
6. (Trained service technician only) If multiple error codes or EasyLED diagnostics
LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, reverse the locations of two
microprocessors to determine whether the error is associated with a
microprocessor or with a microprocessor socket.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor, replace the microprocessor.
v If the error is associated with a VRM, replace the VRM.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor socket, replace the system
board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitor problems
Some Lenovo monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
Testing the monitor
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being
tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
The screen is blank.
1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the
correct connector on the rear of the server.
2. Make sure that:
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
v No POST errors are generated when the server is turned on.
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
The monitor works when you
turn on the server, but the
screen goes blank when you
start some application
programs.
1. Make sure that:
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the
capability of the monitor.
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,
replace the system board.
70 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The monitor has screen jitter, or
the screen image is wavy,
unreadable, rolling, or distorted.
1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider the
location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-Lenovo monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the monitor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Wrong characters appear on the
screen.
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct
language (see “Updating the firmware” on page 267).
2. Reseat the monitor
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional-device problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
An optional device that was just
installed does not work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Make sure that:
and then click Options. Open the Server Options Guide.pdf).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An optional device that used to
work does not work now.
1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are
secure.
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
device.
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
device before you turn on the server.
4. Reseat the failing device.
5. Replace the failing device.
72 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The power-control button does
not work (the server does not
start).
Note: The power-control button
will not function until 3 minutes
after the server has been
connected to ac power.
1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
b. Reconnect the power cords.
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel
operator information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator
information panel.
2. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.
v The DIMM is fully seated.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
d. (Trained service technician only) System board
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply
supports.
The server does not turn off.
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the power cord
and restart the server.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
down, and the LEDs on the
operator information panel are
not lit.
Serial port problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
The number of serial ports that
are identified by the operating
system is less than the number
of installed serial ports.
1. Make sure that:
v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility and none of the
serial ports is disabled.
v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
74 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
You suspect a software
problem.
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you receive any error messages while you use the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact the software vendor.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom
Action
A USB device does not work.
2. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.
3. Make sure that the USB configuration optional devices are set correctly in the
information).
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
| EasyLED diagnostics
EasyLED diagnostics is a system of LEDs on various external and internal
components of the server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.
When LEDs are lit to indicate an error, they remain lit when the server is turned off,
provided that the server is still connected to power and the power supply is
operating correctly.
Before you work inside the server to view the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page 5.
If an error occurs, view the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the operator information panel LEDs on the front of the server.
v If an operator information panel LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the system-event log.
v If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred; go to
step 2 on page 77.
The following illustration shows the operator information panel LEDs that are
visible through the bezel.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
System power-on LED
Hard disk drive activity LED
System-locator LED
System-information LED
System-error LED
The following table lists the operator information panel LEDs, the problems that
they indicate, and actions to solve the problems.
76 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED diagnostics LEDs with the
system-error or information LED also lit
Description
System power (green)
v
v
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself
has failed.
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off
and is not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is
disabled. Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to
ac power, the power-control button becomes active.
v
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to
turn on the server.
v
v
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To
wake the server, press the power-control button or use the IMM
Web interface.
Hard disk drive activity (green)
System information (amber)
When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that there is activity on a
hard disk drive.
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the IMM event log or
in the system-event log. Check the EasyLED panel for more
information.
System error (amber)
When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred. Use
the EasyLED panel and the system service label to further isolate the
error.
2. Look at the EasyLED panel on the front of the server. Lit LEDs on the EasyLED
panel indicate the type of error that has occurred.
The following illustration shows the EasyLED panel LEDs that are visible
through the bezel.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Server processor bus
Microprocessor
VRM
Microprocessor/memory configuration ꢀ11ꢁ System board
Memory
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Power supply
Fan
ꢀ10ꢁ PCI bus
ꢀ12ꢁ Temperature
ꢀ13ꢁ System-event log
ꢀ14ꢁ USB ports
NMI
Hard disk drive/RAID
The following table lists the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs, the problems that they
indicate, and actions to solve the problems.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
System-event log
(LOG)
A system error occurred.
View the contents of the system-event log (see “Event
Temperature
The system temperature has
exceeded a threshold level.
1. See the system-event log for the source of the
fault (see “System-event log” on page 38).
2. Make sure that the airflow in the server is not
blocked.
3. Make sure that the room temperature is neither too
hot nor too cold (see “Environment” in
78 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
System board (BRD)
An error occurred on the system
board.
1. Check the LEDs on the system board to identify
the component that is causing the error. The BRD
LED can be lit for the following conditions:
v Failed or missing battery
v Failed voltage regulator
2. Check the system-event log for information about
the error.
3. Replace any failed or missing replaceable
components, such as the battery.
4. (Trained service technician only) If a voltage
regulator has failed, replace the system board.
PCI bus
A PCI adapter has failed.
2. Check the LEDs on the PCI slots to identify the
component that is causing the error, and reseat the
failing adapter.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Failing adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Fan
A fan has failed or is operating too
slowly.
1. Reinstall the removed fan.
2. If an individual fan LED is lit, replace the fan.
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Power supply
A power supply has failed or has
been removed.
Note: In a redundant power
configuration, the dc power LED on
one power supply might be off.
1. Check the individual power-supply LEDs.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Power supply
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply
cage cables
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Power supply
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply
cage
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
DASD/RAID
A hard disk drive, SAS controller, or
RAID adapter error has occurred.
1. Reinstall the removed drive.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing hard disk drive
Notes:
1. This LED is also lit when a hard
disk drive is removed from the
server.
b. SAS hard disk drive backplane
c. SAS signal and power cables
d. System board
2. The error LED on the failing
hard disk drive is also lit.
e. ServeRAID adapter
time, in the order shown, restarting the server each
time.
3. Check the system-event log for
a RAID error.
NMI
A hardware error has been reported
to the operating system.
2. If the PCI LED is lit, follow the instructions for that
LED.
3. If the MEM LED is lit, follow the instructions for
that LED.
4. Restart the server.
80 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
Memory (MEM)
A memory error has occurred.
Note: The error LED on the DIMM
is also lit.
1. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit,
which indicates that the memory configuration is
invalid. Reinstall the DIMMs in a supported
configuration.
2. If the CNFG LED is not lit, one of the following
conditions might be present:
v The server did not start and a failing DIMM LED
is lit:
a. Check for a PFA log event in the
system-event log.
b. Reseat the DIMM.
c. Move the DIMM to a different slot or replace
the DIMM.
d. (Trained service technician only) Replace
the system board.
v The server started, the failing DIMM is disabled,
and the LED is lit:
a. If the LEDs are lit by two DIMMs, check the
system-event log for a PFA event on one of
the DIMMs, and then replace that DIMM.
Otherwise, replace both DIMMs.
b. If the LED is lit by only one DIMM, replace
that DIMM.
c. Re-enable the DIMM, using the Setup utility.
Microprocessor/
Memory Configuration occurred. (This LED is used with the
(CNFG) MEM, VRM, and CPU LEDs.)
A hardware configuration error has
1. (The system error LED, CPU LED, and this LED
are lit when POST detects a microprocessor
mismatch.) Remove and install two
microprocessors of the same cache size, type, and
clock speed.
2. (The system error LED, MEM LED, and this LED
are lit when POST detects an invalid memory
configuration.) Remove and install supported
DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page
3. (The system error LED, VRM LED, and this LED
are lit when POST detects a missing VRM.) Install
a VRM for microprocessor 2 (see “Installing a
4. Check the system error log for information
indicating incompatible components.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
VRM
A VRM has failed.
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED (for a VRM).
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the
CNFG LED is lit, the memory configuration is
invalid. Reseat the VRM.
3. If the CNFG LED is not lit, reseat the following
components:
a. Failing VRM
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor associated with the VRM
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Failing VRM
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor associated with the VRM
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
Microprocessor (CPU) A microprocessor has failed, or an
invalid microprocessor configuration
is installed.
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the
CNFG LED is not lit, a microprocessor has failed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
a. Make sure that the failing microprocessor,
which is indicated by the CPU1 or CPU2 error
LED on the system board, is installed correctly.
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence.
b. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, restarting the server
each time:
1) (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
2) (Trained service technician only) System
board
c. If the CNFG LED is lit and the CPU mismatch
LED on the system board is also lit, an invalid
microprocessor configuration is installed:
1) Make sure that the microprocessors are
compatible with each other. They must
match in speed and cache size. Use the
Setup utility to compare the microprocessor
information.
2) (Trained service technician only) Replace
the incompatible microprocessor.
82 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
Service processor bus The IMM detects an internal error.
(SP BUS)
1. Disconnect the server from ac power; then,
reconnect the server to power and restart the
server.
2. Update the IMM firmware.
Look at the system service label on the top of the server, which gives an
overview of internal components that correspond to the LEDs on the EasyLED
panel. This information can often provide enough information to diagnose the
error.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a
problem.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
PCI slot 1 error LED
PCI slot 2 error LED
PCI slot 3 error LED
HS heartbeat LED
PCI slot 4 error LED
ꢀ9ꢁ
Battery error LED
ꢀ10ꢁ System-board error LED
ꢀ11ꢁ VRM fail LED
ꢀ12ꢁ CPU 1 error LED
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMMs 1 - 8 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ6ꢁ
PCI slot 5 error LED
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMMs 9 - 16 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
PCI slot 6 error LED
IMM heartbeat LED
ꢀ15ꢁ CPU 2 error LED
ꢀ16ꢁ CPU mismatch LED
84 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one
or two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on
the PCI Express extender card, if one is installed.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI-X extender card, if one is
installed.
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and extender card
and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
DIMM 1 to DIMM 16
error LEDs
A DIMM has failed or is incorrectly
installed.
1. Remove the DIMM that is indicated by a lit error
LED.
2. Reseat the DIMM.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU 1 error LED
Microprocessor 1 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see “Installing a
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
CPU 2 error LED
Microprocessor 2 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see “Installing a
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. Find the failing, missing, or mismatched
microprocessor by checking the LEDs on the
system board.
3. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU mismatch LED
VRM failure LED
A mismatched microprocessor has
been installed.
Note: All microprocessors must
have the same speed and cache
size.
1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
Microprocessor 2 VRM has failed or
is incorrectly installed.
1. Reseat the VRM
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. VRM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
3. Replace the VRM
System-board error
LED
System-board CPU VRD, power
voltage regulators, or both have
failed.
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.
Battery failure LED
Battery low.
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
86 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
IMM heartbeat LED
Indicates the status of the boot
process of the IMM.
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds
of when the server is connected to power, complete
the following steps:
When the server is connected to
power this LED flashes quickly to
indicate that the IMM code is
loading. When the loading is
complete, the LED stops flashing
briefly and then flashes slowly to
indicate that the IMM if fully
operational and you can press the
power-control button to start the
server.
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM
recovery switch to recover the firmware (see
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
PCI slot 1 to PCI slot An error has occurred on a PCI bus
1. Check the system-event log for information about
the error.
8 error LEDs
or on the system board. An
additional LED is lit next to a failing
PCI slot.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
support for additional troubleshooting information.
H8 heartbeat LED
Indicates the status of power-on and
power-off sequencing.
1. If the H8 heartbeat LED is blinking at a 1 Hz rate,
no action is necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) If the H8
heartbeat LED is not blinking, replace the system
board.
Remind button
You can use the remind button on the EasyLED panel to put the system-error LED
on the operator information panel into Remind mode. When you press the remind
button, you acknowledge the error but indicate that you will not take immediate
action. The system-error LED flashes while it is in Remind mode and stays in
Remind mode until one of the following conditions occurs:
v All known errors are corrected.
v The server is restarted.
v A new error occurs, causing the system-error LED to be lit again.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the power-supply LEDs on the rear of the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ac power LED
dc power LED
Power error LED
The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the system power LED on the operator
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
88 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 3. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
AC
DC
Error
Off
Description
Action
Notes
Off
Off
No ac power to
the server or a
problem with the
ac power source
This is a normal
condition when no
ac power is present.
1. Check the ac power to the server.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
Off
Off
On
No ac power to
the server or a
problem with the
ac power source
and the power
supply had
This happens only
when a second
power supply is
providing power to
the server.
1. Replace the power supply.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
detected an
internal problem
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
Replace the power supply.
Faulty power
supply
Power supply not
fully seated,
faulty system
board, or faulty
power supply
Typically indicates
that a power supply
is not fully seated.
1. Reseat the power supply.
2. If the system-board error LED is not lit,
replace the power supply.
3. (Trained service technician only) If
system-board error LED is lit, replace
the system board.
On
Off or
Flashing
On
Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Normal operation
Power supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty but still
operational
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages and error codes
are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text
message or error code indicates that a problem has been detected; to determine
what action you should take as a result of a message or error code, see the table in
Running the diagnostic programs
To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt Press F2 for Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) is displayed,
press F2.
Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive
for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal
operation while the program loads.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.
Exception: If multiple error codes or EasyLED diagnostics LEDs indicate a
microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor
microprocessor problems.
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try
running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the
component that was being tested when the server stopped.
Diagnostic text messages
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:
Passed: The test was completed without any errors.
Failed: The test detected an error.
90 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Aborted: You stopped the test before it was completed.
Not Applicable: You attempted to test a device that is not present in the server.
Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration.
Warning: The test could not be run. There was no failure of the hardware that was
being tested, but there might be a hardware failure elsewhere, or another problem
prevented the test from running; for example, there might be a configuration
problem, or the hardware might be missing or is not being recognized.
The result is followed by an error code or other additional information about the
error.
Viewing the test log
To view the DSA log when the tests are completed, select Utility from the top of the
screen and then select View Test Log. To view a detailed test log, press Tab while
you view the DSA log. The DSA log data is maintained only while you are running
the diagnostic programs. When you exit from the diagnostic programs, the DSA log
is cleared.
To save the DSA log to a file on a diskette or to the hard disk, click Save Log on
the diagnostic programs screen and specify a location and name for the saved log
file.
Notes:
1. To create and use a diskette, you must add an optional external diskette drive to
the server.
2. To save the test log to a diskette, you must use a diskette that you have
formatted yourself; this function does not work with preformatted diskettes. If the
diskette has sufficient space for the test log, the diskette can contain other data.
Diagnostic messages
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the column.
Table 4. DSA messages
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
089-000-xxx
CPU
CPU Stress
test
Pass
CPU passed
stress test
No action required.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
089-801-xxx
CPU
CPU Stress
Test
Aborted
Internal
program error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
089-802-xxx
CPU
CPU Stress
Test
Aborted
System
resource
availability
error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
92 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
089-901-xxx
CPU
CPU Stress
Test
Failed
Test failure.
1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-801-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: the
IMM returned
an incorrect
response
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
length.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-802-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: the
test cannot be
completed for
an unknown
reason.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-803-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: the
node is busy;
try later.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
94 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-804-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-805-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
command for
the given LUN.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-806-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
timeout while
processing the
command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-807-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: out of
space.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
96 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-808-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
reservation
aborted or
invalid
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
reservation ID.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-809-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
was truncated.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-810-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
length is
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
invalid.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-811-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
field length limit
is exceeded.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
98 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-812-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C Test
stopped a
parameter is
out of range.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-813-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot return
the number of
requested data
bytes.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-814-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
requested
sensor, data, or
record is not
present.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-815-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
data field in the
request.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
100 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-816-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: the
command is
illegal for the
specified
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
sensor or
record type.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-817-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
provided.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-818-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
a duplicated
request.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-819-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; the
SDR repository
is in update
mode.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
102 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-820-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; the
device is in
firmware
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM firmware
are at the latest level.
update mode.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-821-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; IMM
initialization is
in progress.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-822-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped: the
destination is
unavailable.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-823-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
the command;
insufficient
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
privilege level.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
104 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-824-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Aborted
IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
the command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
166-901-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
indicates a
failure in the
H8 bus (Bus 0)
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Remove power from the system.
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-902-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
indicates a
failure in the
I/O Expander
(Bus 1).
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the EasyLED panel.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
106 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-903-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
host bus (Bus
2).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the
test again after replacing each DIMM.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
16. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
17. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
18. Run the test again.
19. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-904-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
indicates a
failure in the
power supply
bus (Bus 3).
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Reseat the power supply.
8. Run the test again.
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
10. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
11. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
108 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-905-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive
indicates a
backplane is not installed.
failure in the
SAS backplane
and the Sensor
bus (Bus 4)
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
166-906-xxx
IMM
IMM I2C Test Failed
The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
PCI bus (Bus
5).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from ac power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
201-801-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Aborted
Test aborted:
the server
firmware
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
programmed
the memory
controller with
an invalid
CBAR address
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
201-802-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Aborted
Test aborted:
the end
address in the
E820 function
is less than 16
MB.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the
Setup utility.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
110 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
201-803-xxx
201-804-xxx
201-805-xxx
201-806-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Aborted
Memory Test Aborted
Memory Test Aborted
Memory Test Aborted
Test aborted:
could not
enable the
processor
cache.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Memory
Memory
Memory
Test aborted:
the memory
controller buffer
request failed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Test aborted:
the memory
controller
display/alter
write operation
was not
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
completed.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Test aborted:
the memory
controller fast
scrub operation
was not
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
completed.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
201-807-xxx
201-808-xxx
201-809-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Aborted
Memory Test Aborted
Memory Test Aborted
Test aborted:
the memory
controller buffer
free request
failed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Memory
Test aborted:
memory
controller
display/alter
buffer execute
error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Memory
Test aborted
program error:
operation
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
running fast
scrub.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
201-810-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Aborted
Test stopped:
unknown error
code xxx
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
received in
COMMONEXIT
procedure.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
112 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
201-901-xxx
Memory
Memory Test Failed
Test failure:
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
single-bit error,
failing bank x,
failing memory
card y, failing
DIMM z.
2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the firmware” on
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
202-801-xxx
Memory
Memory
Stress Test
Aborted
Internal
program error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the
specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
202-802-xxx
Memory
Memory
Stress Test
Failed
General error:
memory size is
insufficient to
run the test.
1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by
checking the Available System Memory in the
Resource Utilization section of the DSA log. If
necessary, enable all memory in the Setup utility
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
202-901-xxx
Memory
Memory
Stress Test
Failed
Test failure.
1. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from
power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
215-801-xxx
Optical Drive
Aborted
Unable to
|
|
|
|
|
|
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
communicate
with the device
driver.
2. Run the test again.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Self-Test
|
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
|
|
|
|
|
5. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
|
|
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
|
|
|
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
114 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
215-802-xxx
Optical Drive
Aborted
The media tray
is open.
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait
for 15 seconds for the media to be recognized.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
4. Run the test again.
Self-Test
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web
site for more troubleshooting information at
215-803-xxx
Optical Drive
Failed
The disc might
be in use by
the system.
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
2. Run the test again
3. Turn off and restart the system.
4. Run the test again.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
Self-Test
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
215-901-xxx
Optical Drive
Aborted
Drive media is
not detected.
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Self-Test
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
215-902-xxx
Optical Drive
Failed
Read
miscompare.
v
Verify
Media
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed
2. Run the test again.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Self-Test
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
215-903-xxx
Optical Drive
Aborted
Could not
access the
drive.
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
v
v
Read/
Write Test
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Self-Test
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
215-904-xxx
Optical Drive
Failed
A read error
occurred.
v
v
Verify
Media
Installed
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
Read/
Write Test
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
Messages
and actions
apply to both
tests.
4. Run the test again.
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
217–800–000
SAS/SATA
Hard Drive
Disk Drive
Test
Aborted
Test aborted.
Run the test again.
116 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
217-900-xxx
SAS/SATA
Hard Drive
Disk Drive
Test
Failed
1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane
connections at both ends.
2. Reseat the all drives.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
264-901-000
264-902-000
264-903-000
264-904-000
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Test
Failed
Failed
Failed
Failed
An error was
found in the
tape alert log
page.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Tape Drive
Test
Media is not
detected.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Tape Drive
Test
Media error.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Tape Drive
Test
Drive hardware
error.
1. Check the tape drive cabling for loose or broken
connections or damage to the cable. Replace
the tape drive cable if damage is present.
2. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
3. Run the test again.
4. Clear the error log.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
264-905-000
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Test
Failed
Software error:
invalid request.
1. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
and restart the system and then run the test
again.
2. Check system firmware level and upgrade if
necessary. The installed firmware level can be
found in the DSA Log within the Firmware/VPD
section for this component.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
and restart the system.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
264-906-000
Tape Drive
Tape Drive
Test
Failed
Unrecognized
error.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
405-901-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Control
Registers
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
405-901-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test MII
Registers
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
118 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
405-902-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test
EEPROM
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
405-903-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Internal
Memory
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup Utility” on
page 252) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
405-904-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Interrupt Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup Utility” on
page 252) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
405-905-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Loop
back at
MAC-Layer
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
405-906-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Loop
back at
Physical
Layer
Failed
1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and make
sure that the cable type and connection are
correct.
2. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
120 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4. DSA messages (continued)
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
See Chapter 8, “Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823,” on page 237 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number
Component
Test
State
Description
Action
405-907-xxx
Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test LEDs
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recovering from a Lenovo ThinkServer Server Firmware update failure
If power to the server is interrupted while you are updating the Lenovo ThinkServer
Server Firmware, the server might not restart correctly or might not display video. If
this happens, complete the following steps to recover:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
4. Locate JP6 on the system board and remove any adapters that impede access
to the jumpers.
Table 5. System-board jumpers
Jumper
number
Jumper
name
Jumper setting
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
JP6
JP1
SW6
UEFI boot
recovery
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Enable the UEFI recovery mode.
CMOS
clear
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clears CMOS.
switch
block
Note: If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1
and 2.
5. Move jumper JP6 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI recovery mode.
6. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the side cover (see
7. Reconnect all external cables and power cords.
8. Insert the update CD into the CD or DVD drive.
9. Turn on the server and the monitor.
After the update session is completed, remove the CD from the drive and turn
off the server.
122 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Disconnect all power cords and external cables.
12. Remove any adapters that impede access to jumper JP6.
13. Move jumper JP6 to back to pins 1 and 2 for normal operation.
14. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the side cover (see
15. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
16. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
The function of each switch and jumper on the system board is described in
Solving power problems
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page
124 for the minimum configuration).
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.
Solving Ethernet controller problems
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.
Try the following procedures:
v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
– If the Ethernet controller is set to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check the LAN activity LEDs on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers
are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.
Solving undetermined problems
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use
the information in this section.
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or
intermittent), see “Software problems” on page 75.
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged Lenovo ThinkServer Server
Firmware can cause undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the
password switch 2 (SW4) to override the power-on password and clear the CMOS
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 88).
If the LEDs indicate that the power supplies are working correctly, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-Lenovo devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM per
microprocessor (2 GB in a two-microprocessor configuration).
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:
v One microprocessor
v One 1 GB DIMM
v One power supply
v Power cord
v ServeRAID SAS adapter
v System board assembly
124 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in
the following order:
a. Power supply
b. Power-supply cage
c. Memory
d. Microprocessor
e. System board
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the
system board or extender card.
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.
Problem determination tips
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that you can
encounter, use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If
possible, have this information available when you request assistance from Lenovo.
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor and hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptoms
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v Lenovo ThinkServer Server Firmware level
v Operating-system type and version level
You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following factors
are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v Lenovo ThinkServer Server Firmware level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup
Chapter 5. Diagnostics 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors
This section describes the controls and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and how to turn
the server on and off.
Front view
The following illustration shows the controls and LEDs on the front of the server.
Note: The front bezel door is not shown so that the drive bays are visible.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
DVD drive activity LED (green)
System-power LED
Power-control button
Hard-disk drive activity LED
System-locator LED
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
ꢀ10ꢁ
ꢀ11ꢁ
System-error LED
USB 2
USB 1
DVD drive eject button
Hard disk drive status LED
(amber)
ꢀ6ꢁ
System-information LED
ꢀ12ꢁ
Hard disk drive activity LED
(green)
Operator information panel
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the operator information panel on the
front of the server.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
System power-on LED
Hard disk drive activity LED
System-locator LED
System-information LED
System-error LED
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRUs).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED diagnostics LEDs with the
system-error or information LED also lit
Description
System power-on (green)
The states of the power-on LED are as follows:
v
Off: ac power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself
has failed.
v
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off
and is not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is
disabled. Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to
ac power, the power-control button becomes active.
v
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to
turn on the server.
v
v
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To
wake the server, press the power-control button or use the IMM
Web interface.
Hard-disk drive activity (green)
System locator (blue)
When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that there is activity on a
hard disk drive.
Use this LED to visually locate the server among other servers.
128 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field
replaceable units (FRUs).
v
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED diagnostics LEDs with the
system-error or information LED also lit
Description
System information (amber)
When this amber LED is on, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the IMM-event log or
in the system-event log. Check the EasyLED diagnostics panel for
more information.
System error (amber)
When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred. Use
the diagnostic LED panel and the system service label to further isolate
the error.
EasyLED diagnostics panel
The following illustration shows the front LEDs on the EasyLED diagnostics panel.
The EasyLED diagnostics panel is located inside the front bezel.
Note: The EasyLED diagnostics LEDs remain lit only while the server is connected
to power.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Server processor bus
Microprocessor
VRM
Microprocessor/memory configuration ꢀ11ꢁ System board
Memory
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Power supply
Fan
ꢀ10ꢁ PCI bus
ꢀ12ꢁ Temperature
ꢀ13ꢁ System-event log
ꢀ14ꢁ USB ports
NMI
Hard disk drive/RAID
For more information about the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs, see “EasyLED
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear view
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Ethernet 10/100/1000
Power-cord connector
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Power-error LED
dc-power LED
ac-power LED
ꢀ10ꢁ Video connector
ꢀ11ꢁ Serial 1 (COM 1)
ꢀ12ꢁ Systems-management connector
USB 1-4 connectors: Connect a USB device, such as USB mouse or keyboard, to
any of these connectors.
Ethernet 10/100/1000 connector: Use these connectors to connect the server to a
network.
Power-cord connector: Connect the power cord to this connector.
Power-error LED: When the power-error LED is lit, it indicates that the power
supply has failed.
dc-power LED: Each hot-swap power supply has a dc-power LED and an
ac-power LED. When the dc-power LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply is
supplying adequate dc power to the system. During typical operation, both the ac
and dc-power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see “Power-supply
130 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ac-power LED: Each hot-swap power supply has an ac-power LED and a dc-power
LED. When the ac-power LED is lit, it indicates that sufficient power is coming into
the power supply through the power cord. During typical operation, both the ac and
dc-power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see “Power-supply
Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector.
Serial 1 connector (COMM 1): Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector. The
serial port is shared with the integrated management module (IMM). The IMM can
take control of the shared serial port to perform text console redirection and to
redirect serial traffic, using Serial over LAN (SOL).
Systems-management connector: Use this connector to connect the server to a
network for systems-management information control. This connector is used only
by the IMM.
System-board internal connectors
The following illustrations show the internal connectors and switches on the system
board.
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Microprocessor 2
System power
ADV power
ꢀ21ꢁ
ꢀ22ꢁ
ꢀ23ꢁ
ꢀ24ꢁ
ꢀ25ꢁ
ꢀ26ꢁ
ꢀ27ꢁ
ꢀ28ꢁ
ꢀ29ꢁ
ꢀ30ꢁ
ꢀ31ꢁ
Wake on LAN
ꢀ2ꢁ
Battery
ꢀ3ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 7
PCI - 32 slot 6
ꢀ4ꢁ
Optical power
Front panel
ꢀ5ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 5
PCI Express x8 slot 4
PCI Express x8 slot 3
PCI Express x8 slot 2
PCI Express x8 slot 1
Virtual media key connector
VRM connector (Microprocessor 2)
USB
ꢀ6ꢁ
EasyLED panel
USB tape
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
DIMM 8
ꢀ9ꢁ
DIMM 1
ꢀ10ꢁ
ꢀ11ꢁ
ꢀ12ꢁ
ꢀ13ꢁ
ꢀ14ꢁ
ꢀ15ꢁ
ꢀ16ꢁ
ꢀ17ꢁ
ꢀ18ꢁ
ꢀ19ꢁ
ꢀ20ꢁ
SATA backplane 2 power
Front USB
SAS/SATA configuration backplane 1 ꢀ32ꢁ
SAS/SATA configuration backplane 2 ꢀ33ꢁ
NMI button
SATA backplane 1 power
Microprocessor 1
Fans 4, 5, and 6
SATA 0
ꢀ34ꢁ
ꢀ35ꢁ
ꢀ36ꢁ
ꢀ37ꢁ
ꢀ38ꢁ
ꢀ39ꢁ
ꢀ40ꢁ
RJ45 (10/100)
Microprocessor power
Video
Serial
SATA 2 - 5
Power supply power
DIMM 9
Fans 1, 2, and 3
SATA 1
DIMM 16
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides one
additional expansion slot. The following illustration shows the additional PCI
Express expansion slot that is available on the PCI Express extender card.
Note: The PCI Express extender card comes standard in the TD200x server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 7
The following illustration shows two additional PCI-X expansion slots that are
available on the PCI-X extender card.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
PCI-X 1 slot 7
PCI-X 2 slot 8
132 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-board external connectors
The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors and the NMI
button on the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
Video port
Serial port
10/100m RJ45 LAN connector
NMI button
USB ports
GbE RJ45 LAN connectors
System-board switches and jumpers
The following illustration shows the SW6 switch and the jumpers on the system
board. See the tables below the illustration for information about the switch settings.
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 6. System-board jumpers
Jumper
number
Jumper
name
Jumper setting
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
JP6
JP1
SW6
UEFI boot
recovery
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Enable the UEFI recovery mode.
CMOS
clear
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clears CMOS.
switch
block
Note: If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1
and 2.
Table 7. System-board switch 6
SW 6 Switches
Switch description
Reserved (Default off)
1
2
3
4
Power-on password override when on. (Default off)
Reserved (Default off)
When off, this loads the primary IMM firmware ROM page. When on, this loads the secondary
(backup) IMM firmware ROM page. (Default off)
Notes:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. (Review the information in
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations
in this document are reserved.
134 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
PCI slot 1 error LED
PCI slot 2 error LED
PCI slot 3 error LED
HS heartbeat LED
PCI slot 4 error LED
ꢀ9ꢁ
Battery error LED
ꢀ10ꢁ System-board error LED
ꢀ11ꢁ VRM fail LED
ꢀ12ꢁ CPU 1 error LED
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMMs 1 - 8 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ6ꢁ
PCI slot 5 error LED
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMMs 9 - 16 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
PCI slot 6 error LED
IMM heartbeat LED
ꢀ15ꢁ CPU 2 error LED
ꢀ16ꢁ CPU mismatch LED
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express extender card ꢀ1ꢁ, if one is installed.
The following illustration shows the LEDs (ꢀ1ꢁ and ꢀ2ꢁ) on the PCI-X extender card,
if one is installed.
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and extender card and
suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
DIMM 1 to DIMM 16
error LEDs
A DIMM has failed or is incorrectly
installed.
1. Remove the DIMM that is indicated by a lit error
LED.
2. Reseat the DIMM.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU 1 error LED
Microprocessor 1 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see “Removing a
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
136 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
CPU 2 error LED
Microprocessor 2 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see “Removing a
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. Find the failing, missing, or mismatched
microprocessor by checking the LEDs on the
system board.
3. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU mismatch LED
VRM failure LED
A mismatched microprocessor has
been installed.
Note: All microprocessors must
have the same speed and cache
size.
1. Run the Setup Utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
Microprocessor 2 VRM has failed or
is incorrectly installed.
1. Reseat the VRM
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. VRM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
3. Replace the VRM
System-board error
LED
System-board CPU VRD, power
voltage regulators, or both have
failed.
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.
Battery failure LED
Battery low.
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
IMM heartbeat LED
Indicates the status of the boot
process of the IMM.
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds
of when the server is connected to power, do the
following:
When the server is connected to
power this LED flashes quickly to
indicate that the IMM code is
loading. When the loading is
complete, the LED stops flashing
briefly and then flashes slowly to
indicate that the IMM if fully
operational and you can press the
power-control button to start the
server.
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM
recovery switch to recover the firmware (see
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit EasyLED
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit
Description
Action
PCI slot 1 to PCI slot An error has occurred on a PCI bus
1. Check the system-event log for information about
the error.
8 error LEDs
or on the system board. An
additional LED is lit next to a failing
PCI slot.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
3. If the failure remains, call Lenovo Service and
Support for additional troubleshooting information.
H8 heartbeat LED
Indicates the status of power-on and
power-off sequencing.
1. If the H8 heartbeat LED is blinking at a 1 Hz rate,
no action is necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) If the H8
heartbeat LED is not blinking, replace the system
board.
SAS backplane connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors on the SAS backplane.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Hard disk drive connectors
Power connector
Signal connector
Configuration connector
138 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the power-supply LEDs on the rear of the server.
For more information about solving power-supply problems, see “Solving power
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ac power LED
dc power LED
Power error LED
The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the operator
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 8. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
ac
dc
Error
Off
Description
Action
Notes
Off
Off
No ac power to
the server or a
problem with the
ac power source
This is a normal
condition when no
ac power is present.
1. Check the ac power to the server.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
Off
Off
On
No ac power to
the server or a
problem with the
ac power source
and the power
supply had
This happens only
when a second
power supply is
providing power to
the server.
1. Replace the power supply.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
detected an
internal problem
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
Replace the power supply.
Faulty power
supply
Power supply not
fully seated,
faulty system
board, or faulty
power supply
Typically indicates
that a power supply
is not fully seated.
1. Reseat the power supply.
2. If the system board error LED is off,
replace the power supply.
3. (Trained service technician only) If the
system board error LED is on, replace
the system board.
On
Off or
Flashing
On
Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Normal operation
Power supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty but still
operational
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers
The illustrations in this section show the LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on the
internal boards. The illustrations might differ slightly from your hardware.
140 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-board internal connectors
The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
ꢀ1ꢁ
Microprocessor 2
System power
ADV power
ꢀ21ꢁ
ꢀ22ꢁ
ꢀ23ꢁ
ꢀ24ꢁ
ꢀ25ꢁ
ꢀ26ꢁ
ꢀ27ꢁ
ꢀ28ꢁ
ꢀ29ꢁ
ꢀ30ꢁ
ꢀ31ꢁ
Wake on LAN
ꢀ2ꢁ
Battery
ꢀ3ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 7
PCI - 32 slot 6
ꢀ4ꢁ
Optical power
Front panel
ꢀ5ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 5
PCI Express x8 slot 4
PCI Express x8 slot 3
PCI Express x8 slot 2
PCI Express x8 slot 1
Virtual media key connector
VRM connector (Microprocessor 2)
USB
ꢀ6ꢁ
EasyLED panel
USB tape
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
DIMM 8
ꢀ9ꢁ
DIMM 1
ꢀ10ꢁ
ꢀ11ꢁ
ꢀ12ꢁ
ꢀ13ꢁ
ꢀ14ꢁ
ꢀ15ꢁ
ꢀ16ꢁ
ꢀ17ꢁ
ꢀ18ꢁ
SATA backplane 2 power
Front USB
SAS/SATA configuration backplane 1 ꢀ32ꢁ
SAS/SATA configuration backplane 2 ꢀ33ꢁ
NMI button
SATA backplane 1 power
Microprocessor 1
Fans 4, 5, and 6
SATA 0
ꢀ34ꢁ
ꢀ35ꢁ
ꢀ36ꢁ
ꢀ37ꢁ
ꢀ38ꢁ
RJ45 (10/100)
Microprocessor power
Video
Serial
SATA 2 - 5
Power supply power
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ19ꢁ
ꢀ20ꢁ
Fans 1, 2, and 3
SATA 1
ꢀ39ꢁ
ꢀ40ꢁ
DIMM 9
DIMM 16
142 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows one additional PCI
Express expansion slot that is available on the PCI Express extender card, if
equipped.
ꢀ1ꢁ
PCI Express x8 slot 7
The following illustration shows two additional PCI-X expansion slots that are
available on the PCI-X extender card, if equipped.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
PCI-X 1 slot 7
PCI-X 2 slot 8
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-board switches and jumpers
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.
Table 9. System-board jumpers
Jumper
number
Jumper
name
Jumper setting
JP1
CMOS clear
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clears CMOS memory.
JP6
UEFI boot
recovery
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Enable the UEFI recovery mode.
Note: If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the jumper is on pins 1 and 2.
Table 10. System-board switch 6
SW 6 Switches
Switch description
1
2
3
4
Reserved (default off)
Power-on password override when on. (default off)
Reserved (default off)
When this switch is off, the primary IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. When this switch is on,
the secondary (backup) IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. (default off)
Notes:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. (Review the information in
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations
in this document are reserved.
144 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
PCI slot 1 error LED
PCI slot 2 error LED
PCI slot 3 error LED
HS heartbeat LED
PCI slot 4 error LED
ꢀ9ꢁ
Battery error LED
ꢀ10ꢁ System-board error LED
ꢀ11ꢁ VRM fail LED
ꢀ12ꢁ CPU 1 error LED
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMMs 1 - 8 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ6ꢁ
PCI slot 5 error LED
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMMs 9 - 16 error LEDs (starting
from the bottom)
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
PCI slot 6 error LED
IMM heartbeat LED
ꢀ15ꢁ CPU 2 error LED
ꢀ16ꢁ CPU mismatch LED
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI
Express extender card ꢀ1ꢁ, if one is installed.
The following illustration shows the LEDs (ꢀ1ꢁ and ꢀ2ꢁ) on the PCI-X extender card,
if one is installed.
System-board external connectors
The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors on the system
board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
Video port
Serial port
10/100m RJ45 LAN connector
NMI button
USB ports
GbE RJ45 LAN connectors
146 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors on the 2.5-inch hard disk drive
backplane.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Hard disk drive connectors
Power connector
Signal connector
Configuration connector
Server power features
When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the integrated
management module (IMM) is shut down; however, the server can respond to
requests from the IMM, such as a remote request to turn on the server. The
power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac power but not
turned on.
Turning on the server
Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the
power-control button becomes active, and one or more fans might start running to
provide cooling while the server is connected to power. You can turn on the server
and start the operating system by pressing the power-control button.
The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:
v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart
automatically when power is restored.
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN® feature, the Wake on LAN
feature can turn on the server.
For 32-bit operating systems only: Some memory is reserved for various
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of
memory that is reserved for system resources depends on the operating system,
the configuration of the server, and the configured PCI options.
Chapter 6. Locating Server Controls and connectors 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning off the server
When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can
respond to requests from the IMM, such as a remote request to turn on the server.
While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans might continue
to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect it from the power
source.
Important: To view the error LEDs on the system board, leave the server
connected to a power source.
Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server.
See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the
operating system.
Statement 5:
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.
2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the
server will be turned off automatically.
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this
feature.
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.
v The IMM can turn off the server as an automatic response to a critical system
failure.
v You can turn off the server through a request from the IMM.
148 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer
replaceable units
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is
working correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts,
if an operating system is installed. If the server is not working correctly, see the
Chapter 5, “Diagnostics,” on page 27 for diagnostic information.
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing optional hardware devices in
the server.
Server components
The following illustration shows the major components in the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Cover
ꢀ14ꢁ USB cable/EasyLED diagnostics
assembly
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Air baffle
Heat sink
Microprocessor
Heat sink retention bracket
DIMMs
System board
VRM
ꢀ15ꢁ DVD drive
ꢀ16ꢁ Bezel
ꢀ17ꢁ Optical drive bay EMC shield
ꢀ18ꢁ 2.5-inch EMC shield
ꢀ19ꢁ 2.5-inch hot-swap drive
ꢀ20ꢁ 2.5-inch drive cage assembly
ꢀ21ꢁ SAS/SATA 2.5-inch backplane
ꢀ22ꢁ Fan assembly
ꢀ10ꢁ Power-supply cage
ꢀ11ꢁ Power supply
ꢀ12ꢁ Power-supply filler
ꢀ13ꢁ Control panel assembly
ꢀ23ꢁ Hot-swap fan
ꢀ24ꢁ ServeRAID MR10i
ꢀ25ꢁ ServeRAID BR10i
ꢀ26ꢁ ServeRAID MR10is
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component to
remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates that
the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and operating
system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the component while
the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on hot-swap
components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific hot-swap
component for any additional procedures that you might have to perform before you
remove or install the component.
Opening the bezel
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is
working correctly. If an operating system is installed, start the server, and make
sure that the operating system starts. If no operating system is installed, start the
server and make sure that a 19990305 error code is displayed, indicating that an
operating system was not found but the server is otherwise working correctly. If the
diagnostic information.
The following illustration shows how to open the bezel.
Notes:
1. The left-side cover does not have to be removed to open the bezel.
2. The left-side cover lock must be unlocked to open or remove the bezel.
Complete the following steps to open the bezel:
2. Using the supplied key, unlock the left-side cover and bezel.
3. Press on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate the left side of the bezel away
from the server.
150 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Closing the bezel
ꢀ1ꢁ
Pull point
To close the bezel, do the following:
1. Rotate the left side of the bezel toward the server to the closed position.
2. Lock the left-side cover, using the key that comes with the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the bezel
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Bezel
Hinge assembly
Retention tabs
To remove the bezel, do the following:
2. Unlock the left-side side cover.
Note: You must unlock the side cover to remove the bezel.
152 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the retention tabs ꢀ1ꢁ on the hinge assembly toward each other and pull
the hinge assembly out of the chassis.
Note: The bezel will also disengage from the chassis hinges if you rotate the
bezel beyond 180° or if excessive pressure is applied to the bezel. Do not be
alarmed because this is how the bezel was designed. The bezel is designed
with breakaway hinges so that you can easily reattach it to the chassis.
5. If you are instructed to return the bezel, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the bezel
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Bezel
Hinge assembly
Retention tabs
To install the bezel, do the following:
1. Align the hinge assemblies with the hinge holes on the chassis.
2. Push the hinges into the holes on the chassis until they snap into place.
3. If however, the bezel was removed by detaching the sliding hinge mount from
the hinge assembly (using the breakaway method as the bezel was designed to
do), complete the following steps to reattach the bezel:
a. Press in on the rear of the sliding hinge mount until it extends beyond the
edge of the bezel and hold it in place.
154 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b. Align the sliding hinge mount ꢀ1ꢁ with the hinge pin ꢀ2ꢁ on the hinge
assembly ꢀ3ꢁ on the chassis.
c. Press the sliding hinge mount against the hinge pin until the sliding hinge
mount snaps onto the hinge pin.
5. Lock the left-side cover.
Opening the bezel media door
To open or remove the media door, do the following:
2. Unlock the side cover.
Note: You must unlock the side cover to open or remove the bezel. When you
lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Grasp the depressed area on the left side of the bezel door and rotate the bezel
to the open position.
4. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab up to unlock
the bezel media door; then, grasp the depressed area on the left side of the
media door and pull the door open.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Bezel media door
Media door lock
Note: To remove the media door from the bezel, push upward on the media
door hinge to remove it from the bezel.
5. When the media door is unlocked, the icon on the side of the bezel ꢀ1ꢁ will be
in the unlocked position.
Closing the bezel media door
To close the media door, do the following:
1. Swing the bezel media door closed and push it into the bezel to close it.
2. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab down to lock
the bezel media door.
156 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Bezel media door
Media door lock
Removing the left-side cover
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is
working correctly. If an operating system is installed, start the server, and make
sure that the operating system starts. If no operating system is installed, start the
server and make sure that a 19990305 error code is displayed, indicating that an
operating system was not found but the server is otherwise working correctly. If the
diagnostic information.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Cover release latch
Lock
Left-side cover
To remove the cover, do the following:
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If you are planning to view the error LEDs that are on the system board and
components, leave the server connected to power and go directly to step 5.
3. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
4. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
5. Using the supplied key, unlock the left-side cover.
6. Pull the cover-release latch down and rotate the top edge of the cover away
from the server.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before you turn
on the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30
minutes) with the cover removed might damage server components.
7. Remove the left-side cover from the server.
Installing the left-side cover
To install the left-side cover, complete the following steps:
1. Set the bottom edge of the left-side cover on the bottom ledge of the server.
2. Rotate the top edge of the cover toward the server and press inward on the
cover until it clicks into place.
3. Lock the cover, using the key that comes with the server.
Opening the power-supply cage
Opening the power-supply cage allows access to the air baffle, microprocessors,
and DIMMs. To open the power-supply cage, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
158 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the release latch on the power supplies and filler panels and pull them
out of the power-supply cage.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Release latch
Hot-swap power supply
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover.
5. Pull up on the power-supply cage handle to unlock the cage; then, rotate the
cage out until it stops. The tab on the rear power-supply latch bracket will click
into place when the cage is completely out of the way.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Power-supply cage
Power-supply cage handle
6. Let the power-supply cage rest on the rear power-supply latch bracket.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Closing the power-supply cage
To return the power-supply cage to its closed position, do the following:
1. Rotate the power-supply cage back slightly; then, push the release tab on the
rear power-supply support bracket out of the way.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Power supply support bracket
Power supply release tab
Attention: Be sure to move the cables out of the way of the power supply
cage before you start to move the cage back into the server.
160 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Carefully rotate the power-supply cage into the server chassis. The locating tabs
on the power-supply cage must fit over the corresponding tabs on the front latch
bracket.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
Power-supply cage handle
Power-supply cage
Power-supply cage front latch bracket
Locating tabs
Notch
Locating tabs
3. Rotate the power-supply cage handle down until the handle tip engages the
notch in the front latch bracket; then, lower the handle until it locks in place
(power supply cage closed ꢀ1ꢁ).
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Install the hot-swap power supplies.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Turning the stabilizing feet
To rotate the front feet, do the following:
1. Carefully position the server on a flat surface. The feet (ꢀ1ꢁ) should hang over
the edge of the flat surface to ease removal.
2. Press in on the clips to hold the feet in place; then, pry the feet away from the
server. In some cases, you might need a screwdriver to pry the feet from the
server.
162 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Reinstall the feet ꢀ1ꢁ in the opposite location. The tab on the feet should extend
beyond the edge of the server.
Internal cable routing and connectors
You can install either an USB or a SATA tape drive in the server. The following
illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors for both the USB tape
drive and the SATA tape drive. It also shows the internal power cable for the optical
drives.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
Optical drive power cable
USB signal cable connector
USB signal cable
Optical drive power cable
SATA optical drive signal cable
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID BR10i controller to eight 2.5-inch hard disk drives. The left port
on the ServeRAID BR10i controller is connected to the backplane for drives 4-7 and
the right port on the adapter is connected to the backplane for drives 0-3.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Cable for drives 4-7
Cable connector for drives 4-7
Cable for drives 0-3
Cable connector for drives 0-3
164 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID BR10i controller to 16 2.5-inch hard disk drives.
The following illustration shows the cable connectors on the ServeRAID-BR10i
controller.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ServeRAID-BR10i controller
Cable connector for drives 0 - 3
Cable connector for drives 4 - 7
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the internal SAS/SATA cable routing and connectors
from the ServeRAID MR10i or ServeRAID MR10is controllers to eight 2.5-inch hard
disk drives. The right port on the ServeRAID MR10i or ServeRAID MR10is
controller is connected to the backplane for drives 4-7 and the left port on the
controller is connected to the backplane for drives 0-3.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Cable for drives 4 - 7
Cable connector for drives 4 - 7
Cable for drives 0 - 3
Cable connector for drives 0 - 3
The following illustration shows the cable connectors on the ServeRAID-MR10i
controller.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ServeRAID-MR10i controller
Cable connector for drives 4 - 7
Cable connector for drives 0 -3
Battery
166 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the internal SAS power and signal cable routing
from the hard disk drives to the connectors on the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
SAS power cable connector B
SAS power cable connector A
The following illustration shows the internal SATA and power cable routing and the
connectors from the DVD drive to the system board.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors from the
operator information panel to the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Operator information panel cable connector
Operator information panel cable
The following illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors from the
EasyLED diagnostics panel to the system board.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
EasyLED cable connector
EasyLED cable
168 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the air baffle
To remove the air baffle, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Remove the left-side cover.
5. Remove the power supplies from the power supply cage.
6. Unlatch the power supply cage and rotate it out of the server until it locks.
7. Rotate the rear of the air baffle up ꢀAꢁ, then find the pinch-tab ꢀ1ꢁ on the air
baffle, pinch it together with your fingers ꢀBꢁ, and lift ꢀCꢁ the air baffle ꢀ2ꢁ out of
the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the air baffle
To install the air baffle, do the following:
1. With the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle ꢀ3ꢁ lifted up, align the positioning
pins on the ends of the air baffle with the locating holes in the server chassis
and fan-cage assembly.
2. Slide the air baffle down into the server ꢀ1ꢁ until the positioning pins fit into the
locating holes; then, press down on the air baffle until the pinch tab clicks into
place.
3. Rotate the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle ꢀ2ꢁ down to the system board.
Note: Make sure that the power-supply cage cables are not caught under the
air baffle.
6. Install and lock the left-side cover.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
170 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the fan-cage assembly
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Fan cage assembly
Fan cage assembly release buttons
To remove the fan-cage assembly, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the side cover facing up.
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
9. Press the fan cage release latches on each side of the fan cage toward the
sides of the server. The fan cage will lift up slightly when the release latches
are fully open.
10. Grasp the fan-cage assembly and lift it out of the server.
11. If you are instructed to return the fan-cage assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the fan-cage assembly
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Fan cage assembly
Fan cage assembly release buttons
To install the fan-cage assembly, do the following:
1. Align the guides on the fan cage with release latches on each side.
2. Push the fan-cage assembly into the server until it clicks into place.
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing the battery
To remove the battery, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the side cover facing up.
172 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to push the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it
away from the socket.
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket.
8. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Installing the battery
The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace
the battery in the server:
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the
same manufacturer.
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the
system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.
Statement 2:
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only the battery recommended by the
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery,
replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer.
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or
disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)
v Repair or disassemble
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install the replacement battery, do the following:
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the replacement battery ꢀ1ꢁ:
a. Hold the battery in a vertical orientation so that the smaller side is facing the
socket.
b. Place the battery into its socket, and press the battery towards the socket
until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip holds the battery
securely.
4. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Note: You must wait approximately 2 1/2 minutes after you connect the server
power cord to an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes
active.
5. Start the Setup Utility and reset the configuration:
v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
Removing a hot-swap power supply
If you remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.
Statement 8:
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, you must turn off
the server before removing the power supply.
174 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove a hot-swap power supply, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the connector on the back of the power supply
that you are removing.
3. Press the release latch on the power supply ꢀ1ꢁ and pull the power supply ꢀ2ꢁ
out of the power-supply cage.
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap power supply, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Installing a hot-swap power supply
If you install or remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.
Statement 8:
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Hot-swap power supply
Release latch
To install a hot-swap power supply, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power supply to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply from the
package.
3. Remove the power-supply filler panel from the power bay, if one is installed.
4. Place the power supply into the power-supply cage and push it in until it locks
into place.
Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, a
power-supply filler must be installed in the empty power bay.
176 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Connect one end of the power cord for the new power supply into the connector
on the back of the power supply; then, connect the other end of the power cord
to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Note: If the server has been turned off, you must wait approximately 3 minutes
after you connect the server power cord to an electrical outlet before the
power-control button becomes active.
6. Make sure that the ac power LED on the top of the power supply is lit,
indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. If the server is turned on,
make sure that the dc power LED on the top of the power supply is lit also.
Installing redundant power supply and fans
You can install a second 920-watt hot-swap power-supply. This upgrade option
includes a hot-swap power supply and three hot-swap fans. You must also
purchase a second power cord to connect the power-supply to a power source.
To install the redundant power and cooling option, do the following:
3. Remove the three fan air baffles ꢀ1ꢁ from the fan bays of the fan cage
assembly.
4. Install the three hot-swap fans ꢀ2ꢁ in the empty bays of the fan cage assembly.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Release latch
Hot-swap power supply
5. Remove the power supply filler from the second power supply bay.
6. Slide the new power supply partially into the empty power supply bay. Pinch the
orange release latch and push the power supply the rest of the way into the bay
until it is seated.
7. Install the left-side cover.
8. Connect one end of the new power cord into the connector on the back of
power supply, and connect the other end of the power cord to a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
9. Make sure that the ac power LED on the top of each power supply is lit,
indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. If the server is turned on,
make sure that the dc power LED on the top of the power supply is lit also.
If you have other optional devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
178 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a voltage regulator module
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Microprocessor 2 VRM
Heat sink 2
VRM connector
To remove a voltage regulator module (VRM), do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
8. Locate the voltage regulator module next to microprocessor 2.
9. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
10. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the VRM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a voltage regulator module
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Microprocessor 2 VRM
Heat sink 2
VRM connector
To install a voltage regulator module, do the following:
1. Locate the VRM connector on the system board, next to the heat sink for
microprocessor 2 (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 131).
2. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
3. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
4. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with the
slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight down into
the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM simultaneously.
The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the VRM is seated in the
connector.
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket
To remove the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
180 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.
5. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on a static-protective surface (see
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
6. Lift the top of the front adapter-retainer bracket and release the hinge point;
then, remove the bottom hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.
7. If you are instructed to return the front adapter-retention bracket, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Installing the front adapter-retention bracket
To install the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Insert one hole on the front adapter-retention bracket into the hinge point.
2. Position the other hole and insert the adapter-retention bracket into the hinge
point.
4. Close the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the rear adapter retention bracket
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Hinge pin
To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
4. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on a static-protective surface (see
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
removing the adapters.
5. Open the rear adapter retention bracket.
6. Press the rear adapter retention bracket and release the top hinge point; then,
release the other hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.
7. If you are instructed to return the rear adapter-retention bracket, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
182 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the rear adapter retention bracket
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Hinge pins
To install the rear adapter retention bracket, do the following:
1. Insert the bottom hinge point on the rear adapter retention bracket into the
matching hole in the chassis; then, insert the top hinge point into the matching
hole.
3. Close the rear adapter retention bracket.
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing an adapter
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Adapter
Front adapter retention bracket
To remove an adapter, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Rotate the adapter retention brackets to the open position.
6. Disconnect the cables from the adapter.
7. Remove the screw that secures the adapter to the server chassis.
8. Pull the adapter out of the adapter connector; then, lift the adapter out of the
server.
9. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Installing an adapter
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter:
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section. If you must change the
switch or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that come with
the adapter.
184 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the adapter.
v PCI slots 1 and 6 support half-length PCI adapters only.
v PCI slots 2, 3, 4, and 5 support full-length and half-length PCI adapters.
v The PCI Express extender card supports a full-length adapter.
v The PCI-X extender card supports two full-length adapters.
v PCI slots 1 and 5 support the RAID adapters.
v PCI slot 2 supports a VGA adapter.
v The PCI configuration:
– Slot 1 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express Base Specification
Revision 2.0 compliant.
– Slot 2 is a PCI Express x16 slot with x8 links, PCI Express Base Specification
Revision 2.0 compliant.
– Slots 3 and 4 are PCI Express x8 slots with x4 links, PCI Express Base
Specification Revision 2.0 compliant.
– Slot 5 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express Base Specification
Revision 2.0 compliant.
– Slot 6 is a PCI 33/32 slot, PCI 2.2 compliant.
– PCI Express extender card slot 7 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x4 links, PCI
Express 1.0a compliant.
Note: The PCI Express extender card comes standard on the ThinkServer
TD200x server.
– PCI-X extender card slots 7 and 8 are a PCI-X slots with 64/32 bits,
133/100/66 MHz from PXH.
v The system scans PCI slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources. The system
then starts (boots) the system devices in the following order, if you have not
changed the default boot precedence: integrated Ethernet controller,
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS Controller, and then PCI, PCI-X, and PCI Express slots.
Note: To change the boot precedence for PCI and PCI-X devices, start the
Setup Utility” on page 252 for details about using the Setup Utility.
v The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters so that
you can install PCI adapters that do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered on might cause the server to stop, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the
power on.
To install an adapter, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables. Remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the left-side
cover” on page 157 for more information).
3. See the documentation that comes with the adapter for any cabling instructions
and information about jumper or switch settings. (It might be easier for you to
route cables before you install the adapter.)
4. Open the rear adapter-retention bracket.
5. Remove the expansion-slot cover.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Adapter
Front adapter retention bracket
6. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide ꢀ1ꢁ (if
any) from the end of the adapter. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
7. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot, lower the adapter-retention
bracket, and make sure that the bracket is in the closed position.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or
the adapter.
8. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
186 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
Removing the DVD drive
To remove the DVD drive ꢀ1ꢁ, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
4. Disconnect the DVD drive cables from the back of the DVD drive.
6. Grasping the blue tabs on each side of the DVD drive, press them inward while
you pull the drive out of the sever.
7. Remove the rails from the DVD drive and save them for future use.
8. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a DVD (optical) drive
To install a DVD (optical) drive ꢀ1ꢁ, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
4. Install the rails on the sides of the DVD drive.
5. Connect one end of the DVD drive cables to the rear of the DVD drive.
6. Slide the drive into the server.
7. Connect the other end of the DVD drive cables to the optical power connector
cable connector locations and “Internal cable routing and connectors” on page
163 for cable routing information.)
8. Replace the left-side cover and bezel; then, lock the side cover and bezel.
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords.
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
188 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing an optional tape drive
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
EMC shield
Tape drive
To remove an optional tape drive, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
9. Disconnect the drive signal cable from the system board.
10. Disconnect the power cable from the back of the tape drive.
11. If the tape drive is secured to the server with screws, remove them.
12. Gently pull the tape drive and signal cable out of the server.
13. If you are instructed to return the tape drive, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a USB or SATA tape drive
The server supports USB and SATA tape drives. When you install a tape drive, be
sure to connect the internal tape cable to the correct connector on the system
board.
To install a tape drive, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
page 157 for more information).
4. Open the bezel by pressing on the bezel retention tab at the center-left edge
of the bezel and rotating the left side of the bezel away from the server (see
5. Remove the EMC shields ꢀ1ꢁ from the drive bays.
6. Find the blue drive rails in the server bay and install one on each side of the
tape drive.
7. Slide the tape drive ꢀ2ꢁ into the server.
8. Close the bezel.
9. Remove the power supplies from the rear of the server.
10. Carefully lay the server down on its side.
158 for more information).
information).
13. Remove the fan-cage assembly.
190 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Fan-cage assembly release buttons
Fan-cage assembly
a. Press the fan-cage release latches on the top and bottom of the fan cage
toward the sides of the server. The cage lifts slightly when the release
latches are fully open.
b. Grasp the cage and lift it out of the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. If the tape drive came with screws, secure the drive to the server chassis,
using the supplied screws.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
SATA optical drive power connector
USB signal cable connector
USB signal cable
SATA optical drive power cable (SATA-to-traditional power connector cable also
included. Not pictured.)
ꢀ5ꢁ
SATA optical drive signal cable
15. Connect one end of the tape drive cable to the USB or SATA connector on the
system board, depending upon the type of tape drive that you are installing;
then, route the cable through the cable holders on the inside of the server and
connect the opposite end of the cable to the back of the tape drive.
Note: If you are installing an RDX internal USB tape drive, use the
SATA-to-traditional power converter cable to serve as a bridge between the
optical power cable and the power connector on the RDX tape drive.
16. Connect the power cable to the tape drive and to the connector on the system
information.)
17. Reinstall the fan-cage assembly.
21. Replace the left-side cover; then, lock the side cover and bezel.
22. Reconnect the external cables and power cords.
192 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
| Removing the USB cable and EasyLED panel
ꢀ1ꢁ
Spring clips
To remove the USB cable and EasyLED panel from the server, complete the
following steps:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices; then, disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
5. Carefully lay the server down on its side.
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
10. Disconnect the EasyLED diagnostics cable from the system board (see
11. Stand the server back up in its vertical position.
13. Press down on the release latch on the top of the USB cable and EasyLED
panel mounting bracket; then, rotate the top of the mounting bracket away
from the server.
14. Lift the USB cable and EasyLED panel mounting bracket out and away from
the server while you pull the diagnostics cable through the hole.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB cable and EasyLED panel:
a. Rotate the USB cable and EasyLED panel mounting bracket so that you
are looking at the rear of the bracket.
b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
pull the USB cable away from the mounting bracket.
16. If you are instructed to return the USB cable and EasyLED panel, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
| Installing the USB cable and EasyLED panel
ꢀ1ꢁ
Spring clips
To install the USB cable and EasyLED panel, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the USB cable and EasyLED
panel to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the
assembly from the package.
2. Connect the USB cable to the replacement USB cable and EasyLED panel:
a. Rotate the USB cable and EasyLED panel mounting bracket so that you
are looking at the rear of the bracket.
b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
align the key on the cable connector with the notch on the mounting
bracket.
c. Insert the connector into the mounting bracket; then, release the retaining
clips.
3. Feed the EasyLED diagnostics cable into the server through the opening in the
front of the server.
4. Position the bottom of the USB cable and EasyLED panel mounting bracket
into the opening and rotate the top of the bracket toward the server until it
clicks into place.
5. Connect the EasyLED diagnostics cable to the system board. See
connectors” on page 163 to locate the USB and EasyLED diagnostics
connectors on the system board.
194 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Filler panel
Hard disk drive assembly
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Release latch
Drive handle
To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press down on the release latch to open the drive handle; then, pull the drive
out of the drive bay.
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
The following notes describe the types of hard disk drives that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a hard disk drive:
v Depending on the model, the server supports up to eight or up to 16 2.5-inch
SAS hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays.
v The hot-swap bays are arranged horizontally in the top and bottom hard disk
drive cages:
– On models with eight hard disk drives, the top bays are numbered 0 through 7
(from right to left)
– On models with 16 hard disk drives, the top bays are numbered 0 through 7
(from right to left) and the bottom bays are 8 through 15 (from right to left)
ꢀ0ꢁ
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Bay 0
Bay 1
Bay 2
Bay 3
Bay 4
Bay 5
Bay 6
Bay 7
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Bay 8
Bay 9
ꢀ10ꢁ
ꢀ11ꢁ
ꢀ12ꢁ
ꢀ13ꢁ
ꢀ14ꢁ
ꢀ15ꢁ
Bay 10
Bay 11
Bay 12
Bay 13
Bay 14
Bay 15
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see
v Inspect the drive and drive bay for signs of damage.
196 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Make sure that the drive is correctly installed in the drive bay.
v See the documentation for the ServeRAID controller for instructions for installing
a hard disk drive.
v All hot-swap drives in the server must have the same throughput speed rating;
using drives with different speed ratings might cause all drives to operate at the
throughput of the slowest drive.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays. However, you must turn off the server when you perform any steps
that involve installing or removing cables.
v The drive ID for each hot-swap hard disk drive is printed above the drive bay.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Filler panel
Hard disk drive assembly
Release latch
Drive handle
To install a hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the disk drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the disk drive from the package.
3. Remove the filler panel from the hot-swap drive bay, if one is installed.
4. Make sure that the tray handle is open; then, install the hard disk drive into the
hot-swap bay.
5. Rotate the drive handle down until the drive is seated in the hot-swap bay and
the release latch clicks into place.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
a. After installing the hard disk drive, check the disk drive status LEDs to verify
that the hard disk drive is operating correctly.
If the amber hard disk drive status LED is lit continuously, that drive is faulty
and must be replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing,
the drive is being accessed.
b. If the server is configured for RAID operation using an optional ServeRAID
adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install hard
disk drives. See the documentation that was included with the optional
adapter for additional information about RAID operation.
Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Latch
Tabs
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Configuration cable connector
SAS signal cable connector
2.5-inch hot-swap backplane
Power cable connector
Locator pin
To remove a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
198 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
10. Note where the power, signal, and configuration cables are connected to the
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane; then, disconnect them (see “SAS
11. Lift the retention latch that holds the backplane in place; then, grasp the top
edge of the backplane and rotate it toward the rear of the server. When the
backplane is clear of the drive-cage retention tabs, remove it from the server.
remove the remaining backplane.
13. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Latch
Tabs
Configuration cable connector
SAS signal cable connector
2.5-inch hot-swap backplane
Power cable connector
Locator pin
To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hard disk drive backplane
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the backplane
from the package.
2. Position the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane in the drive-cage retention tabs;
then, rotate the top of the backplane toward the locator pins until the latch
clicks into place
3. Connect the power, signal, and configuration cables to the 2.5-inch hard disk
drive backplane (see “2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane connectors” on page
200 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
2.5-inch hard disk drive cage
2.5-inch hot-swap drive
To remove the 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
11. Disconnect the cables from the 2.5-inch disk drive backplane.
12. Press both drive cage release latches inward; then, pull the drive cage out of
the front of server.
202 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Remove both of the backplanes from the 2.5-inch disk drive cage (see
14. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch disk drive cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
2.5-inch hard disk drive cage
2.5-inch hot-swap drive
To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive cage
from the package.
2. Install both 2.5-inch disk drive backplanes in the back of the drive cage (see
3. Slide the 2.5-inch disk drive cage into the opening in the front of the server;
then, press drive cage in until the release latches click into place.
4. Install any hot-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the drive cage
6. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
204 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing the operator information panel assembly
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Release latch
Control panel assembly
To remove the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
9. Disconnect the operator information panel assembly cable from the system
10. Locate the operator information panel assembly release latch just above the
DVD drive.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Push up on the release latch while you pull the operator information panel
assembly toward the rear of the server; then, angle the back of the assembly
toward the system board and remove the assembly from the server.
12. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that
are supplied to you.
Installing the operator information panel assembly
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Release latch
Control panel assembly
To install the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the operator information
panel assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove
the assembly from the package.
2. Angle the operator information panel assembly so that the edge of the
assembly is in the guide slot.
3. Slide the operator information panel assembly forward until the release latch
clicks into place.
4. Connect the operator information panel assembly cable to the system board
206 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing an extender card
ꢀ1ꢁ
Extender card retaining screws
To remove an extender card, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove the system board and place it on a static-protective surface (see
Note: Do not remove the DIMMs, heat sinks, microprocessors, VRM, or battery
from the system board.
7. Remove the two screws that secure the extender card to the system-board tray.
8. Pull the extender card out of the system-board connector.
9. If you are instructed to return the extender card, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
208 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing an extender card
ꢀ1ꢁ
Extender card retaining screws
To install an extender card, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the extender card to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the extender card from the
package.
2. Align the extender card with its connector on the system board; then, slide the
extender card into the connector.
3. Install the two screws that secure the extender card to the system-board tray.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing a memory module
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
DIMM
Retaining clip
To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing up.
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, handle the clips gently.
9. Move the DIMM retaining clips on the side of the DIMM connector to the open
position by pressing the retaining clips away from the center of the DIMM
connector.
10. Using your fingers, lift the DIMM out of the DIMM connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
210 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a memory module
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that
your server supports and other information that you must consider when you install
DIMMs.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Microprocessor 1
Microprocessor 2
v The server supports industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 800, 1066, or
1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999 (single-, dual-, or quad-rank), registered,
synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory
modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC). See
supported memory modules for the server.
v At least one DIMM must be installed for each installed microprocessor for the
server to operate, but three DIMMs per microprocessor improves server
performance.
v When two microprocessors are installed in the server, distribute the DIMMs
between the two microprocessors to improve server performance.
v The server supports a maximum of 16 single-, dual-, or quad-rank DIMMs.
v The memory controller has three registered DIMM channels per microprocessor
(Channels 0, 1, and 2). Channels 0 and 1 support three DIMMs and Channel 2
supports two DIMMs.
v When installing DIMMs, install them starting with the connector farthest from the
microprocessor within each channel.
v When installing a quad-ranked DIMM in a channel with single- or dual-ranked
DIMMs, install the quad-ranked DIMM in the connector farthest from the
microprocessor.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v The server supports 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB DIMMs, with a minimum of 1 GB and
a maximum of 64 GB of system memory.
For 32-bit operating systems only: Some memory is reserved for various
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of
memory that is reserved for system resources depends on the operating system,
the configuration of the server, and the configured PCI devices.
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM
in the server.
v The server can operate in two major modes: mirroring and independent channel
modes.
Independent channel mode
The server requires at least one installed DIMM per microprocessor. The server
comes with a minimum of two 1 GB DIMMs, installed in connectors 3 and 6.
Connector 3 (in channel 0) and connector 6 (in channel 1) are the farthest
connectors from microprocessor 1 in those channels. When you install additional
Note: If you have configured the server to use memory mirroring, do not use the
shown there.
Table 11. DIMM installation sequence for independent channel mode
Installed microprocessors
Microprocessor 1
DIMM connector population sequence
3, 6, 8, 2, 5, 7, 1, 4
Microprocessor 2
11, 14, 16, 10, 13, 15, 9, 12
Memory mirroring mode
Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs within
two channels simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller switches
from the primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of DIMMs. You must
enable memory mirroring through the Setup Utility. For details about enabling
memory mirroring feature, consider the following information:
v When you use memory mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a time.
One DIMM must be in channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in the same
connector in channel 1. The two DIMMs in each pair must be identical in size,
type, rank (single, dual, or quad), and organization. They do not have to be
identical in speed. The channels run at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of
each pair.
v Channel 2, DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring
mode.
v The maximum available memory is reduced to half of the installed memory when
memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install 64 GB of memory, only
32 GB of addressable memory is available when you use memory mirroring.
The following illustration shows the memory channel interface layout with the DIMM
installation sequence for mirroring mode. The numbers within the boxes indicate the
DIMM population sequence in pairs within the channels, and the numbers next to
the boxes indicate the DIMM connectors within the channels. For example, the
212 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
following illustration shows that the first pair of DIMMs (indicated by ones (1) inside
the boxes) should be installed in DIMM connector 3 on channel 0 and DIMM
connector 6 on channel 1. DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 on channel 2 are not
used in memory-mirroring mode.
Figure 1. Memory channel interface layout
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
CPU 1
CPU 2
QPI
The following table lists the DIMM connectors on each memory channel.
Table 12. Connectors on each memory channel
Memory channel
DIMM connectors
1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 11
4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14
7, 8, 15, 16
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2 (not used in memory mirroring)
The following illustration shows the memory connector layout that is associated with
each microprocessor. For example, DIMM connectors 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and
16 (DIMM connectors are shown underneath the boxes) are associated with
microprocessor 2 socket (CPU2) and DIMM connectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are
associated with microprocessor 1 socket (CPU1). The numbers within the boxes
indicate the installation sequence of the DIMM pairs. For example, the first DIMM
pair (indicated within the boxes by ones (1)) should be installed in DIMM connectors
3 and 6, which are associated with microprocessor 1 (CPU1).
Note: You can install DIMMs for microprocessor 2 as soon as you install
microprocessor 2; you do not have to wait until all of the DIMM connectors for
microprocessor 1 are filled.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 2. Memory connectors associated with each microprocessor
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
CPU 1
CPU 2
The following table lists the installation sequence for installing DIMMs in
memory-mirroring mode.
Table 13. Memory-mirroring mode DIMM population sequence
Number of installed
DIMMs
microprocessors
DIMM connector
First pair of DIMMs
Second pair of DIMMs
Third pair of DIMMs
Fourth pair of DIMMs
Fifth pair of DIMMs
Sixth pair of DIMMs
1
1
1
2
2
2
3, 6
2, 5
1, 4
14, 11
13, 10
12, 9
Note: DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring mode.
When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information changes.
When you restart the server, the system displays a message that indicates that the
memory configuration has changed.
214 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows how to install DIMMs on the system board.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered on might cause the server to stop, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the
power on.
To install a DIMM, do the following:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices; then, disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
4. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the server.
5. Pull up the power-supply cage handle, then swing the power-supply cage out
information).
169 for more information).
7. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the
DIMM connectors, open and close the clips gently.
8. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
9. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
DIMM
Retaining clip
10. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector. Firmly press the DIMM straight down
into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the DIMM
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the
DIMM is firmly seated in the connector. If there is a gap between the DIMM
and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been correctly inserted; open the
retaining clips, remove the DIMM, and then reinsert it.
15. Reconnect the power cords and external cables.
If you have other optional devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
216 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to remove
any hot-swap fan in the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Hot-swap fan
To remove a hot-swap fan, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not leave the top cover off the
server for more than 2 minutes.
3. Open the fan-locking handle by sliding the orange release latch in the direction
of the arrow.
4. Pull outward on the free end of the handle to remove the fan from the server.
5. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap fan, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to install
any hot-swap fan in the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Hot-swap fan
To install a hot-swap fan, do the following:
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap fan to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the fan from the package.
3. Open the fan-locking handle on the replacement fan.
4. Insert the fan into the socket and close the handle to the locked position.
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink
To remove a microprocessor, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
218 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
8. Remove the microprocessor heat sink:
a. Lift the heat-sink release lever to the fully open position.
b. Rotate the back of the heat sink out of the retention bracket and remove
the heat sink from the server.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat
sink. Touching the thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease
on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, you must
ꢀ1ꢁ
Heat sink flange
Microprocessor
Release level locking tab
Retainer bracket
Alignment tab
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Heat sink release level
Notch
9. Lift the microprocessor-release latch to the fully open position (approximately
135° angle); then, lift the bracket frame and remove the microprocessor from
the socket.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Microprocessor release latch
Microprocessor bracket frame
Microprocessor
10. If you are removing microprocessor 2, remove the voltage regulator module
(VRM) from the connector next to microprocessor socket 2.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Installing a microprocessor and heat sink
The following notes describe the types of microprocessor that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a microprocessor:
v The server supports certain Intel® Xeon® scalable multi-core microprocessors,
which are designed for the LGA 1366 socket. These microprocessors are 64-bit
dual-core or quad-core microprocessors with an integrated memory controller,
quick-path interconnect, and shared last cache. See http://www.lenovo.com/
thinkserver for a list of supported microprocessors.
v The server supports up to two microprocessors. If the server comes with one
microprocessor, you can install a second microprocessor.
v Both microprocessors must have the same QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link
speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power segment,
cache size, and type.
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to determine
whether you must update the server firmware. To download the most current
level of server firmware and many other code updates for your server, complete
the following steps:
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.
3. Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.
4. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
5. Click System TD200x to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
220 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v (Optional) Obtain an SMP-capable operating system. For a list of supported
operating systems and optional devices, see http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver.
v To order additional microprocessor optional devices, contact your Lenovo
marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you
do not have to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.
v The heat-sink FRU is packaged with the thermal grease applied to the underside:
– If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner)
is removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom
of the heat sink or set down the heat sink.
– You must replace the thermal grease if it becomes contaminated or has come
in contact with another object other than its paired microprocessor.
– The thermal grease is available as a separate FRU.
v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board to install the
second microprocessor.
v Some models support dual-core processors and quad-core processors. Do not
use dual-core processors and quad-core processors in the same server. Install all
dual-core or all quad-core processors in the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Heat sink 2
Microprocessor release lever
VRM connector
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Alignment key tab
Microprocessor 2
Alignment key
Microprocessor 2 VRM
To install a microprocessor, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor from
the package.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Open the microprocessor socket by pressing down on the end of the release
lever, moving it to the side, and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Microprocessor
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
Alignment triangles
Notches
Microprocessor bracket frame
3. Open the microprocessor bracket frame and remove the microprocessor filler,
if one is installed.
Attention:
a. Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
b. Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during
installation or removal can damage the contacts.
c. Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.
d. Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented, aligned, and positioned in
the socket before you try to close the lever.
4. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor
from the package.
b. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if any is present.
c. Align the microprocessor with the socket. The microprocessor has two
notches that are keyed to two tabs on the sides of the socket. A
triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor points to a
45-degree angle on one corner of the socket.
d. Carefully place the microprocessor into the socket. Do not use excessive
force when you press the microprocessor into the socket.
Note: The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.
5. Close the microprocessor bracket frame and hold it down; then, close the
microprocessor retention latch and lock it securely in place.
222 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
Microprocessor release latch
Microprocessor bracket frame
Microprocessor
6. Install a heat sink on the microprocessor.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or
set down the heat sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the
thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease is contaminated, call
Lenovo service to request a replacement thermal grease kit. For information
about installing the replacement thermal grease, see “Thermal grease” on
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Thermal grease
Heat sink
a. Make sure that the heat-sink release lever is in the fully open position.
b. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink, if one
is installed.
c. Position the heat sink above the microprocessor with the thermal-grease
side down.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
Heat sink flange
Microprocessor
Release level locking tab
Retainer bracket
Alignment tab
Heat sink release level
Notch
Attention: The heat sink is keyed to the retention module. Make sure
that the notch on the heat sink fits over the alignment tab on the retention
module.
d. Align the notch on the heat sink with the alignment tab on the retainer
module.
e. Slide the rear flange of the heat sink into the opening in the retainer
bracket.
f. Press down firmly on the front of the heat sink until it is seated securely.
g. Rotate the heat-sink release lever to the closed position and hook it
underneath the locking tab.
7. If you are installing microprocessor 2, install a VRM in the connector next to
microprocessor socket 2 (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 131
for the VRM connector location).
Note: A VRM must be installed for microprocessor 2. The server will not start
if microprocessor 2 is installed without a VRM.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
c. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with
the slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight
down into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the
VRM is seated in the connector.
224 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.
To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and
heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.
Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Microprocessor
0.02 mL of thermal grease
5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL
each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge. This is to ensure uniform distribution.
Note: 0.01 mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied,
approximately half (0.22 mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.
226 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a heat-sink retention module
ꢀ1ꢁ
Alignment triangle
To remove a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
9. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the heat-sink
retention module to the system board; then, lift the heat-sink retention module
from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the heat-sink retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a heat-sink retention module
ꢀ1ꢁ
Alignment triangle
To install a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat-sink retention module in the microprocessor location on the
system board.
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
228 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a microprocessor retention module
To remove a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
9. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the
microprocessor retention module to the system board; then, lift the
microprocessor retention module from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a microprocessor retention module
To install a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Orient the triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor
retention module to the corresponding alignment triangle on the system board;
then, place the retention module on the system board.
2. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
230 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the system board
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Handle
Release lever
To remove the system board, complete the following steps:
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
9. Note where the cables are connected to the system board; then, disconnect
them.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any of the following components that are installed on the system
board and put them in a safe, static-protective place:
11. Rotate the release lever toward the front of the chassis.
12. Slide the system board toward the front of the server to disengage the tabs
from the chassis; then, grasp the handles and carefully lift the system board
out of the server.
13. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Installing the system board
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
Handle
Release lever
To install the system board, complete the following steps:
232 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the system board from
the package.
2. Hold the system board by the handles and insert the system board into the
chassis at an angle; then, slide it toward the rear of the server.
Note: Make sure that none of the server cables are caught under the system
board.
3. Press down on the retention modules; then, rotate the release lever toward the
rear of the chassis to secure the system board.
4. Install any of the following components that you removed from the system
board:
5. Reconnect any cables to the system board that you disconnected during
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Completing the installation
To complete the installation, do the following:
1. Insert the bezel hinges into the slots on the server chassis and close the bezel
2. Position the left-side cover over the server.
3. Place the bottom edge of the cover onto the bottom edge of the server.
4. Rotate the top edge of left-side cover toward the server; then, press down on
the cover handle until it clicks into place (“Installing the left-side cover” on page
5. Rotate the bezel to its fully closed position.
6. Using the supplied key, lock the left-side cover and bezel.
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the cables
Notes:
1. Be sure to turn off the server before you connect any cables to or disconnect
any cables from the server or hot-plug adapter.
2. For additional cabling instructions, see the documentation that comes with the
optional devices. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install
certain optional devices.
3. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with the server and
optional devices. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct
connectors. For example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled “HDD option.”
The following illustration shows the locations of the input and output connectors on
the rear of the server.
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Ethernet 10/100/1000
Power cord connector
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
ꢀ10ꢁ
ꢀ11ꢁ
ꢀ12ꢁ
Power-error LED
dc-power LED
ac-power LED
Video
Serial 1 (COM 1)
Systems management
Updating the server configuration
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove a device, you
might receive a message that the configuration has changed. The Setup Utility
starts automatically so that you can save the new configuration settings. For more
information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring the server,” on page 251.
234 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some optional devices have device drivers that you must install. For information
about installing device drivers, see the documentation that comes with each device.
The server comes with at least one microprocessor. If more than one
microprocessor is installed, the server can operate as a symmetric multiprocessing
(SMP) server. You might have to upgrade the operating system to support SMP. For
operating-system documentation.
If the server has an optional RAID adapter and you have installed or removed a
hard disk drive, see the documentation that comes with the RAID adapter for
information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.
For information about configuring the integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller, see
Chapter 7. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821,
3822, and 3823
The following replaceable components are available for the ThinkServer TD200x
Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 servers. To check for an updated parts listing on
the Web, complete the following steps:
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers
and Storage from the Select your product list.
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
ꢀ1ꢁ
Cover
ꢀ14ꢁ USB cable/EasyLED diagnostics
assembly
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
ꢀ4ꢁ
ꢀ5ꢁ
ꢀ6ꢁ
ꢀ7ꢁ
ꢀ8ꢁ
ꢀ9ꢁ
Rear adapter retention bracket
Air baffle
Heat sink
Microprocessor
Heat sink retention bracket
DIMMs
System board
VRM
ꢀ15ꢁ DVD drive
ꢀ16ꢁ Bezel
ꢀ17ꢁ Optical drive bay EMC shield
ꢀ18ꢁ 2.5-inch EMC shield
ꢀ19ꢁ 2.5-inch hot-swap drive
ꢀ20ꢁ 2.5-inch drive cage assembly
ꢀ21ꢁ SAS/SATA 2.5-inch backplane
ꢀ22ꢁ Fan assembly
ꢀ10ꢁ Power-supply cage
ꢀ11ꢁ Power supply
ꢀ12ꢁ Power-supply filler
ꢀ13ꢁ Control panel assembly
ꢀ23ꢁ Hot-swap fan
ꢀ24ꢁ ServeRAID MR10i
ꢀ25ꢁ ServeRAID BR10i
ꢀ26ꢁ ServeRAID MR10is
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 14. Parts listing, Type 3719
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
46D1389
46D1397
46D1409
46D1407
(Tier 2)
part number
1
2
3
4
5
Side Cover (models CTO All Models)
Retention Module (models CTO All Models)
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)
CPU Heat sink (models CTO All Models)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.66GHz/6.4GTS-8MB QC 95w
(models CTO)
46D1264
46D1266
46D1267
46D1271
46D1272
5
5
5
5
7
7
7
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.4GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.26GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.0GHz/4.8GTS-4MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 1.86GHz/4.8GTS-4MB DC 80w
(models CTO)
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1991
46U1992
46U1993
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 1Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO 45U 45S 45Y 45G 45M 45A 45Q 45T 45H
45R 45E)
7
8
Memory module, 4GB DDR3-1333 2Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1994
System board, TD200x Planar (models CTO 45U 45S 45Y
45G 45M 45A 45Q 45T 45H 45R 45E)
46D1406
9
VRM (models CTO All Models)
39Y7395
39Y7389
39Y7387
10
11
Power Supply Cage (models CTO All Models)
Power supply, 920W Power Supply (models CTO All
Models)
12
14
15
15
Power Supply Filler (models CTO All Models)
USB/Lightpath bracket (models CTO All Models)
Half-High SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)
39Y7391
46D1385
43W8466
43W8467
Half-High SATA Multi-Burner (models CTO 45U 45S 45Y
45G 45M 45A 45Q 45T 45H 45R 45E)
16
17
18
19
TD200x Bezel FRU (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield 4 x 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield Kit (models CTO All Models)
46U2424
46D1402
46C6706
46U2117
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
19
19
Hard disk drive, 146GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2120
46U2124
Hard disk drive, 300GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
238 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 14. Parts listing, Type 3719 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
(Tier 2)
part number
19
Hard disk drive, 73GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2128
20
21
22
23
24
25
2.5″ HDD CAGE (models CTO All Models)
Backplane (models CTO All Models)
46D1405
49Y4462
44E4563
46D1394
43W4297
44E8690
Fan, 120mm (models CTO All Models)
HS 120x38 Fan harness (models CTO All Models)
LSI MR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
LSI BR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO 45U 45S
45Y 45G 45M 45A 45Q 45T 45H 45R 45E)
26
LSI -MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
FOOT STATIONARY GBM (models CTO)
44E8696
13N2985
25R5635
39Y9790
46D1395
46D1400
46D1401
Cable, 24 SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, USB Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Easy LED Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Pure Power Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Backplane Configuration Cable (models CTO All
Models)
Cable, SAS 710mm Cable (models CTO All Models)
46M6498
49Y4514
Cable, Simple Swap SATA Signal/Power Cable (models
CTO All Models)
Cable, CONTROL PANEL PWR/5 LED Cable (models
CTO All Models)
41Y9080
SYSTEM FEET GBM (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, ALIKE (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, RANDOM (models CTO All Models)
PWR/5 LED (models CTO All Models)
26K7345
26K7363
26K7364
46C6707
41Y9292
43V7070
46D1384
46D1390
46D1393
46D1408
46D1410
46D1411
59P4739
46C6704
41A5100
41U3013
43W4341
44E8701
Thermal Grease (models CTO All Models)
SAS Backplate (models CTO All Models)
Fan Cage/Card (models CTO All Models)
PLANAR TRAY (models CTO All Models)
SATA Opt Power (models CTO All Models)
Chassis (models CTO All Models)
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Top/Side cover (models CTO All Models)
ALCOHOL WIPE (models CTO All Models)
Bottom Cover - TD200(x) Rack (models CTO All Models)
Keyboard,. USEng103P (models CTO)
Mouse, Opt.Wheel USB (models CTO)
LSI MR10M SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 14. Parts listing, Type 3719 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
(Tier 2)
part number
NetXtreme II 1000 Express G Ethernet Adapter- PCIe
(models CTO)
39Y6070
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Dual Port Ethernet Adapter
(models CTO)
42C7182
QLogic 10Gb CNA (models CTO)
42C1802
46D1410
42C1816
46U2443
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Qlogic 10Gb SFP+ SR Optical Transce (models CTO)
Service Label (models CTO All Models)
LSI Raid battery (models CTO)
43W4301
Table 15. Parts listing, Type 3821
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
46D1389
46D1397
46D1409
46D1407
(Tier 2)
part number
1
2
3
4
5
Side Cover (models CTO All Models)
Retention Module (models CTO All Models)
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)
CPU Heat sink (models CTO All Models)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.66GHz/6.4GTS-8MB QC 95w
(models CTO)
46D1264
46D1266
46D1267
46D1271
46D1272
5
5
5
5
7
7
7
7
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.4GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.26GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.0GHz/4.8GTS-4MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 1.86GHz/4.8GTS-4MB DC 80w
(models CTO)
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1991
46U1992
46U1993
46U1994
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 1Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
Memory module, 4GB DDR3-1333 2Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
8
9
System board, TD200x Planar (models CTO)
VRM (models CTO All Models)
46D1406
39Y7395
39Y7389
39Y7387
10
11
Power Supply Cage (models CTO All Models)
Power supply, 920W Power Supply (models CTO All
Models)
12
14
Power Supply Filler (models CTO All Models)
USB/Lightpath bracket (models CTO All Models)
39Y7391
46D1385
240 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 15. Parts listing, Type 3821 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
15
Description
(Tier 1)
(Tier 2)
43W8466
43W8467
part number
Half-High SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)
Half-High SATA Multi-Burner (models CTO)
TD200x Bezel FRU (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield 4 x 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield Kit (models CTO All Models)
15
16
46U2424
46D1402
46C6706
46U2117
17
18
19
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
19
19
19
Hard disk drive, 146GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2120
46U2124
46U2128
Hard disk drive, 300GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
Hard disk drive, 73GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2.5″ HDD CAGE (models CTO All Models)
46D1405
49Y4462
44E4563
46D1394
43W4297
44E8690
44E8696
13N2985
25R5635
39Y9790
46D1395
46D1400
46D1401
Backplane (models CTO All Models)
Fan, 120mm (models CTO All Models)
HS 120x38 Fan harness (models CTO All Models)
LSI MR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
LSI BR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
LSI -MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
FOOT STATIONARY GBM (models CTO All Models)
Cable, 24 SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, USB Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Easy LED Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Pure Power Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Backplane Configuration Cable (models CTO All
Models)
Cable, SAS 710mm Cable (models CTO All Models)
46M6498
49Y4514
Cable, Simple Swap SATA Signal/Power Cable (models
CTO All Models)
Cable, CONTROL PANEL PWR/5 LED Cable (models
CTO All Models)
41Y9080
SYSTEM FEET GBM (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, ALIKE (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, RANDOM (models CTO All Models)
PWR/5 LED (models CTO All Models)
26K7345
26K7363
26K7364
46C6707
41Y9292
43V7070
46D1384
46D1390
46D1393
Thermal Grease (models CTO All Models)
SAS Backplate (models CTO All Models)
Fan Cage/Card (models CTO All Models)
PLANAR TRAY (models CTO All Models)
SATA Opt Power (models CTO All Models)
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 15. Parts listing, Type 3821 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
46D1408
46D1410
46D1411
59P4739
46C6704
41A5100
41U3013
43W4341
44E8701
39Y6070
(Tier 2)
part number
Chassis (models CTO All Models)
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Top/Side cover (models CTO All Models)
ALCOHOL WIPE (models CTO All Models)
Bottom Cover - TD200(x) Rack (models CTO All Models)
Keyboard,. USEng103P (models CTO)
Mouse, Opt.Wheel USB (models CTO)
LSI MR10M SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express G Ethernet Adapter- PCIe
(models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Dual Port Ethernet Adapter
(models CTO)
42C7182
QLogic 10Gb CNA (models CTO)
42C1802
46D1410
42C1816
46U2443
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Qlogic 10Gb SFP+ SR Optical Transce (models CTO)
Service Label (models CTO All Models)
LSI Raid battery (models CTO)
43W4301
Table 16. Parts listing, Type 3822
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
46D1389
46D1397
46D1409
46D1407
(Tier 2)
part number
1
2
3
4
5
Side Cover (models CTO All Models)
Retention Module (models CTO All Models)
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)
CPU Heat sink (models CTO All Models)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.66GHz/6.4GTS-8MB QC 95w
(models CTO)
46D1264
46D1266
46D1267
46D1271
46D1272
5
5
5
5
7
7
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.4GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.26GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.0GHz/4.8GTS-4MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 1.86GHz/4.8GTS-4MB DC 80w
(models CTO)
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1991
46U1992
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
242 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 16. Parts listing, Type 3822 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
(Tier 2)
part number
7
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 1Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO 41U 41S 41Y 41G 41M 41A 41Q 41T 41H
41R 41E 42U 42S 42Y 42G 42M 42A 42Q 42T 42H 42R
42E 43G 43M 43A 43Q 43T 43H 43R 43E)
46U1993
7
8
Memory module, 4GB DDR3-1333 2Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1994
System board, TD200x Planar (models CTO 41U 41S 41Y
41G 41M 41A 41Q 41T 41H 41R 41E 42U 42S 42Y 42G
42M 42A 42Q 42T 42H 42R 42E 43U 43S 43Y 43G 43M
43A 43Q 43T 43H 43R 43E)
46D1406
9
VRM (models CTO All Models)
39Y7395
39Y7389
39Y7387
10
11
Power Supply Cage (models CTO All Models)
Power supply, 920W Power Supply (models CTO All
Models)
12
14
15
15
Power Supply Filler (models CTO All Models)
USB/Lightpath bracket (models CTO All Models)
Half-High SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)
39Y7391
46D1385
43W8466
43W8467
Half-High SATA Multi-Burner (models CTO 41U 41S 41Y
41G 41M 41A 41Q 41T 41H 41R 41E 42U 42S 42Y 42G
42M 42A 42Q 42T 42H 42R 42E 43G 43M 43A 43Q 43T
43H 43R 43E)
16
17
18
19
TD200x Bezel FRU (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield 4 x 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield Kit (models CTO All Models)
46U2424
46D1402
46C6706
46U2117
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
19
19
19
Hard disk drive, 146GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2120
46U2124
46U2128
Hard disk drive, 300GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
Hard disk drive, 73GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
20
21
22
23
24
2.5″ HDD CAGE (models CTO All Models)
Backplane (models CTO All Models)
46D1405
49Y4462
44E4563
46D1394
43W4297
Fan, 120mm (models CTO All Models)
HS 120x38 Fan harness (models CTO All Models)
LSI MR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO 41U 41S
41Y 41G 41M 41A 41Q 41T 41H 41R 41E 42U 42S 42Y
42G 42M 42A 42Q 42T 42H 42R 42E 43G 43M 43A 43Q
43T 43H 43R 43E)
25
26
LSI BR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO 45U 45S
45Y 45G 45M 45A 45Q 45T 45H 45R 45E)
44E8690
LSI -MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
FOOT STATIONARY GBM (models CTO All Models)
44E8696
13N2985
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 16. Parts listing, Type 3822 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
25R5635
39Y9790
46D1395
46D1400
46D1401
(Tier 2)
part number
Cable, 24 SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, USB Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Easy LED Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Pure Power Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Backplane Configuration Cable (models CTO All
Models)
Cable, SAS 710mm Cable (models CTO All Models)
46M6498
49Y4514
Cable, Simple Swap SATA Signal/Power Cable (models
CTO All Models)
Cable, CONTROL PANEL PWR/5 LED Cable (models
CTO All Models)
41Y9080
SYSTEM FEET GBM (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, ALIKE (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, RANDOM (models CTO All Models)
PWR/5 LED (models CTO All Models)
26K7345
26K7363
26K7364
46C6707
41Y9292
43V7070
46D1384
46D1390
46D1393
46D1408
46D1410
46D1411
59P4739
46C6704
41A5100
41U3013
43W4341
44E8701
39Y6070
Thermal Grease (models CTO All Models)
SAS Backplate (models CTO All Models)
Fan Cage/Card (models CTO All Models)
PLANAR TRAY (models CTO All Models)
SATA Opt Power (models CTO All Models)
Chassis (models CTO All Models)
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Top/Side cover (models CTO All Models)
ALCOHOL WIPE (models CTO All Models)
Bottom Cover - TD200(x) Rack (models CTO All Models)
Keyboard,. USEng103P (models CTO)
Mouse, Opt.Wheel USB (models CTO)
LSI MR10M SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express G Ethernet Adapter- PCIe
(models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Dual Port Ethernet Adapter
(models CTO)
42C7182
QLogic 10Gb CNA (models CTO)
42C1802
46D1410
42C1816
46U2443
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Qlogic 10Gb SFP+ SR Optical Transce (models CTO)
Service Label (models CTO All Models)
LSI Raid battery (models CTO)
43W4301
244 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 17. Parts listing, Type 3823
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
46D1389
46D1397
46D1409
46D1407
(Tier 2)
part number
1
2
3
4
5
Side Cover (models CTO All Models)
Retention Module (models CTO All Models)
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)
CPU Heat sink (models CTO All Models)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.66GHz/6.4GTS-8MB QC 95w
(models CTO)
46D1264
46D1266
46D1267
46D1271
46D1272
5
5
5
5
7
7
7
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.4GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.26GHz/5.86GTS-8MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 2.0GHz/4.8GTS-4MB QC 80w
(models CTO)
Microprocessor, Xeon 1.86GHz/4.8GTS-4MB DC 80w
(models CTO)
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1991
46U1992
46U1993
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 1Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO 46U 46S 46Y 46G 46M 46A 46Q 46T 46H
46R 46E)
7
8
Memory module, 4GB DDR3-1333 2Rx4 LP RDIMM
(models CTO)
46U1994
System board, TD200x Planar (models CTO 46U 46S 46Y
46G 46M 46A 46Q 46T 46H 46R 46E)
46D1406
9
VRM (models CTO All Models)
39Y7395
39Y7389
39Y7387
10
11
Power Supply Cage (models CTO All Models)
Power supply, 920W Power Supply (models CTO All
Models)
12
14
15
15
Power Supply Filler (models CTO All Models)
USB/Lightpath bracket (models CTO All Models)
Half-High SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)
39Y7391
46D1385
43W8466
43W8467
Half-High SATA Multi-Burner (models CTO 46U 46S 46Y
46G 46M 46A 46Q 46T 46H 46R 46E)
16
17
18
19
TD200x Bezel FRU (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield 4 x 3.5″ (models CTO All Models)
EMC Shield Kit (models CTO All Models)
46U2424
46D1402
46C6706
46U2117
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
19
19
Hard disk drive, 146GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2120
46U2124
Hard disk drive, 300GB 10K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 17. Parts listing, Type 3823 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
(Tier 2)
part number
19
Hard disk drive, 73GB 15K SFF 6Gbps HS HDD (models
CTO All Models)
46U2128
20
21
22
23
24
2.5″ HDD CAGE (models CTO All Models)
Backplane (models CTO All Models)
46D1405
49Y4462
44E4563
46D1394
43W4297
Fan, 120mm (models CTO All Models)
HS 120x38 Fan harness (models CTO All Models)
LSI MR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO 41U 41S
41Y 41G 41M 41A 41Q 41T 41H 41R 41E 42U 42S 42Y
42G 42M 42A 42Q 42T 42H 42R 42E 43G 43M 43A 43Q
43T 43H 43R 43E)
25
26
LSI BR-10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO 46U 46S
46Y 46G 46M 46A 46Q 46T 46H 46R 46E)
44E8690
LSI -MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
FOOT STATIONARY GBM (models CTO All Models)
Cable, 24 SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, USB Cable (models CTO All Models)
44E8696
13N2985
25R5635
39Y9790
46D1395
46D1400
46D1401
Cable, Easy LED Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Pure Power Cable (models CTO All Models)
Cable, Backplane Configuration Cable (models CTO All
Models)
Cable, SAS 710mm Cable (models CTO All Models)
46M6498
49Y4514
Cable, Simple Swap SATA Signal/Power Cable (models
CTO All Models)
Cable, CONTROL PANEL PWR/5 LED Cable (models
CTO All Models)
41Y9080
SYSTEM FEET GBM (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, ALIKE (models CTO All Models)
KEYLOCK, RANDOM (models CTO All Models)
PWR/5 LED (models CTO All Models)
26K7345
26K7363
26K7364
46C6707
41Y9292
43V7070
46D1384
46D1390
46D1393
46D1408
46D1410
46D1411
59P4739
46C6704
41A5100
41U3013
Thermal Grease (models CTO All Models)
SAS Backplate (models CTO All Models)
Fan Cage/Card (models CTO All Models)
PLANAR TRAY (models CTO All Models)
SATA Opt Power (models CTO All Models)
Chassis (models CTO All Models)
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Top/Side cover (models CTO All Models)
ALCOHOL WIPE (models CTO All Models)
Bottom Cover - TD200(x) Rack (models CTO All Models)
Keyboard,. USEng103P (models CTO)
Mouse, Opt.Wheel USB (models CTO)
246 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 17. Parts listing, Type 3823 (continued)
CRU
CRU
part number part number
FRU
Index
Description
(Tier 1)
43W4341
44E8701
39Y6070
(Tier 2)
part number
LSI MR10M SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)
3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express G Ethernet Adapter- PCIe
(models CTO)
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Dual Port Ethernet Adapter
(models CTO)
42C7182
QLogic 10Gb CNA (models CTO)
42C1802
46D1410
42C1816
46U2443
Hot Swap Fan Cage (models CTO All Models)
Qlogic 10Gb SFP+ SR Optical Transce (models CTO)
Service Label (models CTO All Models)
LSI Raid battery (models CTO)
43W4301
Power cords
For your safety, IBM® provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to
use with this Lenovo product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord
and plug with a properly grounded outlet.
Lenovo power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by
Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA).
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
Lenovo power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in
that country or region.
Table 18. Power cords, Type 3719
Lenovo Power cord
part number
39M5247
39M5102
39M5123
39M5130
Used in these countries and regions
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 45M)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 45G)
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 18. Power cords, Type 3719 (continued)
Lenovo Power cord
part number
39M5144
39M5151
39M5158
39M5165
39M5172
39M5081
39M5219
39M5199
39M5068
39M5226
39M5179
39M5233
Used in these countries and regions
South Africa 2.8M (models CTO 45G 45M 45A)
UK 2.8M (models CTO)
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 45S 45G)
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 45Y 45G)
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 45G)
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 45U 45S 45A 45T 45H 45V)
Korea 2.8M (models CTO 45R)
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 45E)
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 45Y)
India 2.8M (models CTO 45Q)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)
Table 19. Power cords, Type 3821
Lenovo Power cord
part number
39M5247
39M5102
39M5123
39M5130
39M5144
39M5151
39M5158
39M5165
39M5172
39M5081
39M5219
39M5199
39M5068
39M5226
39M5179
39M5233
Used in these countries and regions
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO)
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO)
UK 2.8M (models CTO)
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO)
Italy 2.8M (models CTO)
Israel 2.8M (models CTO)
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO)
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)
Japan 2.8M (models CTO)
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO)
India 2.8M (models CTO)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)
Table 20. Power cords, Type 3822
Lenovo Power cord
part number
39M5247
39M5102
39M5123
39M5130
Used in these countries and regions
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 41M 42M 43M)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO 41A 42A 43A)
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 41G 42G 43G)
248 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 20. Power cords, Type 3822 (continued)
Lenovo Power cord
part number
Used in these countries and regions
39M5144
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 41G 41M 41A 42G 42M 42A 43G
43M 43A 44G)
39M5151
39M5158
39M5165
39M5172
39M5081
UK 2.8M (models CTO 41G 41A 42G 42A 43G 43A)
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 41Y 41G 42Y 42G 43Y 43G)
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 41S 41G 42S 42G 43S 43G)
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 41G 42G 43G)
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 41U 41A 41T 42U 42A 42T 43U
43A 43T)
39M5219
39M5199
39M5068
39M5226
39M5179
39M5233
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)
Japan 2.8M (models CTO)
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 41Y 42Y 43Y)
India 2.8M (models CTO 41Q 42Q 43Q)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)
Table 21. Power cords, Type 3823
Lenovo Power cord
part number
39M5247
39M5102
39M5123
39M5130
39M5144
39M5151
39M5158
39M5165
39M5172
39M5081
39M5219
39M5199
39M5068
39M5226
39M5179
39M5233
Used in these countries and regions
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 46M)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 46G)
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 46G 46M 46A)
UK 2.8M (models CTO)
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 46S 46G)
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 46Y 46G)
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 46G)
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 46U 46S 46A 46T 46H 46V)
Korea 2.8M (models CTO 46R)
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 46E)
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 46Y)
India 2.8M (models CTO 46Q)
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)
Chapter 8. Parts Listing, TD200x Machine Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server
The following configuration programs come with the server:
v Setup Utility
The Setup Utility (formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program) is part
of the server firmware. Use it to change the startup-device sequence, set the
date and time, and set passwords. For information about using this program, see
v Boot Menu program
The Boot Menu program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the
startup sequence that is set in the Setup Utility and temporarily assign a device
to be first in the startup sequence.
v Integrated management module
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to
remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see “Using the
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the
integrated management module (IMM). These features allow you to access the
network remotely and to mount or unmount drives or images on the client
system. For more information about how to enable the remote presence function,
v Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup Utility for modifying UEFI settings
and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify UEFI
settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to access
the Setup Utility. For more information about using this program, see “Advanced
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the
|
v LSI Configuration Utility program
|
|
|
|
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA
controller with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For
information about using this program, see “Using the LSI Configuration Utility
|
|
The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.
|
Table 22. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
|
|
|
RAID array configuration
(before operating system is (after operating system is
installed) installed)
RAID array management
Server configuration
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA LSI Utility (invoked from the
Controller (LSI 1068)
installed
|
|
|
Setup Utility)
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
|
Table 22. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID
arrays (continued)
|
|
|
RAID array configuration
(before operating system is (after operating system is
installed) installed)
RAID array management
Server configuration
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA MegaRAID BIOS
Controller (LSI 1078)
installed
|
|
|
|
Configuration Utility (press C
to start)
|
Using the Setup Utility
Use the Setup Utility, formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program, to
perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Resolve configuration conflicts
Starting the Setup Utility
To start the Setup Utility, do the following:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup Utility menu is available.
3. Select the settings to view or change.
Setup Utility menu choices
The following choices are on the Setup Utility main menu. Depending on the
version of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these
descriptions.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup Utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information.
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.
– System Summary
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other choices in the Setup
252 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
– Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.
– Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings. To configure
memory mirroring, select System Settings → Memory, and then select
Memory Channel Mode → Mirroring.
– Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote console
redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA
controller, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots. If you disable a device,
it cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it
(this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).
– Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
– Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT 19h
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable the UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are not UEFI-compliant.
– Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- POST Watchdog Timer
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- POST Watchdog Timer Value
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.
- Reboot System on NMI
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt
(NMI) occurs. Enabled is the default.
- Commands on USB Interface Preference
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address; specify
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP
address; save the network changes.
- Reset IMM to Defaults
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the adapters and drivers in the
server that are compliant with UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0.
v Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network options, such as the iSCSI,
PXE, and network devices. There might be additional configuration choices for
optional network devices that are compliant with UEFI 2.1 and later.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view or boot to devices, including the startup sequence.
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting. If
the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
WAKE on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for media in a CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and
then the network adapter.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the
error messages in the system-event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move
between pages in the error log.
The system-event logs contain all event and error messages that have been
generated during POST, by the systems-management interface handler, and by
the system service processor. Run the diagnostic programs to get more
information about error codes that occur. See“Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 90 for instructions for running the diagnostic programs.
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the system-event log. Also, after you complete a
repair or correct an error, clear the system-event log to turn off the system-error
LED on the front of the server.
– POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the error messages
in the POST event log.
– System Event Log
Select this choice to view the error messages in the system-event log.
– Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the system-event log.
254 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v User Security
information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup Utility menu.
– Set Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. For more
information, see “Power-on password” on page 256.
– Clear Power-on Password
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. For more information, see
– Set Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If an administrator password is set,
the full Setup Utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator
– Clear Administrator Password
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup Utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.
Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup Utility menu only.
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup Utility menu.
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If you set only an administrator
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup Utility menu.
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full
Setup Utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
password has access to only the limited Setup Utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.
Power-on password
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will
not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.
When a power-on password is set, you can enable the Unattended Start mode, in
which the keyboard and mouse remain locked but the operating system can start.
You can unlock the keyboard and mouse by typing the power-on password.
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of
the following ways:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup Utility and reset the power-on password.
battery” on page 172 for instructions for removing the battery.
256 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Change the position of the power-on password switch (enable switch 2 of the
system board switch block (SW6)) to bypass the power-on password check (see
the following illustration).
ꢀ1ꢁ
ꢀ2ꢁ
ꢀ3ꢁ
UEFI boot recovery jumper (JP6)
Clear CMOS jumper (JP1)
SW6 switch block
Attention: Before you change any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn
off the server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the
jumpers on any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in this
document.
While the server is turned off, move switch 2 of the switch block (SW6) to the On
position to enable the power-on password override. You can then start the Setup
Utility and reset the power-on password. You do not have to return the switch to
the previous position.
The power-on password override jumper does not affect the administrator
password.
Administrator password
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If an administrator password is set, you
must type the administrator password for access to the full Setup Utility menu. You
can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the
password.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Boot Selection Menu program
The Boot Selection Menu is used to temporarily redefine the first startup device
without changing boot options or settings in the Setup Utility.
To use the Boot Selection Menu program, do the following:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. Press F12 (Select Boot Device). If a bootable USB mass storage device is
installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk) is displayed.
4. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup Utility.
RAID controllers
The following table lists the various utilities available to configure RAID controllers
before an operating system is installed.
Table 23. RAID utilities
RAID configuration
utility
Where to find more
information
Description
Location
EasyStartup RAID
configuration utility
EasyStartup DVD
v For use with all
factory-supported
RAID controllers
v Automatically
detects hardware
and lists all
supported RAID
configurations
v Configures one
disk array per
controller using all
drives currently
attached to the
controller
v Created a RAID
response file that
can be used to
configure RAID
controllers on
similarly configured
Lenovo servers.
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility
(WebBIOS)
For:
In system firmware.
To access:
v ServeRAID-MR10i
controller
v Use UEFI Setup
Utility.
v
ServeRAID-MR10is v Press Ctrl + H at
controller
the WebBIOS
prompt during
startup.
v
ServeRAID-MR10m
controller
258 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 23. RAID utilities (continued)
RAID configuration
utility
Where to find more
information
Description
Location
LSI Logic MPT Setup For:
Utility
In system firmware.
To access:
v ServeRAID-BR10i
controller
v Use UEFI Setup
Utility.
v ServeRAID-BR10ie
controller
v Press Ctrl + C at
the LSI prompt
during startup.
Using the LSI Configuration Utility program
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in
this document.
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives
The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.
You can use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID
1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install a
different type of RAID adapter, follow the instructions in the documentation that
comes with the adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.
In addition, you can download an LSI command-line configuration program from
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage
arrays, consider the following information:
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following
features:
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks. All data on the
primary disk can be migrated.
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as
RAID 1E)
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight
disks. All data on the array disks will be deleted.,
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All
data on the array disks will be deleted.
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for
attached devices.
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program
To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, do the following:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup Utility menu is available.
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.
4. Select Please refresh this page first and press Enter.
5. Select the device driver that is applicable for the SAS controller in the server.
For example, LSI Logic Fusion MPT SAS Driver.
6. To perform storage-management tasks, see the SAS controller documentation.
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.
Formatting a hard disk drive
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a
mirrored pair.
To format a drive, do the following:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you
want to format and press Enter.
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or
the End key. Press Alt+D.
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, do the following:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for which you want to
create an array.
2. Select RAID Properties.
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.
4. In the RAID Disk column, use the Spacebar or Minus (-) key to select [Yes]
(select) or [No] (deselect) to select or deselect a drive from a RAID disk.
5. Continue to select drives, using the Spacebar or Minus (-) key, until you have
selected all the drives for your array.
6. Press C to create the disk array.
7. Select Save changes then exit this menu to create the array.
260 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Exit the Setup Utility.
Using the WebBIOS utility
The WebBIOS configuration utility enables you to create and manage RAID
configurations on LSI SAS controllers. The WebBIOS utility resides in the SAS
controller BIOS and operates independently of the operating system. The WebBIOS
utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the configuration of
virtual disks and physical arrays.
Starting the WebBIOS utility
Perform the following steps to start the WebBIOS utility and access the main menu:
1. After you turn on the power and when the computer is starting, you are
prompted to press Ctrl + H when the following message is displayed:
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS
2. Select an adapter from the list.
3. Click Start. The main WebBIOS utility interface is displayed. You can toggle
between the physical view and logical view of the storage devices that are
connected to the controller. Click Physical View or Logical View on the menu
in the left pane to change the view.
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility
The main menu includes the following options:
Adapter Properties
From this view, you can display and modify the properties of the SAS
adapter that is currently selected.
Scan Devices
From this view, you can re-scan the physical and virtual disks for any
changes in the drive status or physical configuration.
Virtual Disks
From this view, you can display and modify the virtual disk properties,
delete virtual disks, initialize disks, and perform other tasks.
Physical Drives
From this view, you can view the physical drive properties, create hot spare
disks, and perform other tasks.
Configuration Wizard
Select this to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage
configuration, clear a configuration, or add a new configuration.
Adapter Selection
From this view, you can select a different SAS adapter. Then, you can view
information about the adapter and the drives connected to it, or create a
new configuration for the adapter.
Physical View or Logical View
Select this to toggle between the Physical View and Logical View.
Events
From this view, you can display the system events in the Event Information
page.
Exit
Select this to exit the WebBIOS utility and continue with the system boot.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard
Follow these steps to start create a storage configuration:
1. Click Configuration Wizard to start the wizard.
2. Select a configuration option:
Attention: If you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration, all
existing data in the configuration is deleted. Make a backup copy of any data
that you want to keep before selecting these options.
Clear Configuration
Clears the existing configuration.
New Configuration
Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new
configuration.
Add Configuration
Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it (this
does not cause any data loss).
3. Click Next.
4. Select a configuration mode from the following options:
Custom Configuration
In this mode, you can control all attributes of the new storage
configuration.
Auto Configuration and Redundancy
This mode automatically creates an optimal RAID 1 or RAID 5
configuration, providing data redundancy.
Auto Configuration without Redundancy
This mode automatically created a non-redundant RAID 0 configuration.
5. Click Next to continue.
Viewing and changing adapter properties
You can view information for one LSI SAS adapter at a time. If your system has
multiple LSI SAS adapters, you can view information for a different adapter, click
Adapter Selection on the main view. To view the properties for the currently
selected adapter, click Adapter Properties on the main WebBIOS screen.
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties
On the WebBIOS main screen, select a virtual disk from the list and click Virtual
Disk.
The Properties panel displays the RAID level, state, size, and stripe size.
The Policies panel lists the virtual disk policies that were defined when the storage
configuration was created. To change any of these policies, select a policy from the
menu and click Change. The Operations panel lists operations that can be
performed on the virtual disk. Select the operation and click Go. Then choose from
the following operations:
v Select Del to delete this virtual disk.
v Select Locate and the LEDs flash on the physical drives used by this virtual disk.
v Select Fast or Slow to initialize this virtual disk.
Attention: Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual disk
that you want to save. All data on the virtual disk is lost when you initialize it.
262 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD
The ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD simplifies the process of configuring your RAID
controller and installing an operating system. The program works in conjunction with
your Windows or Linux operating-system installation disc to automate the process
of installing the operating system and associated device drivers.
If you did not receive a ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD with your server, you can
download an image from the Lenovo Support Web site at
The EasyStartup program has the following features:
v Self-booting DVD
v Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface
v Integrated help system
v Automatic hardware detection
v RAID configuration utility
v Device drivers (based on the server model and detected devices)
v Selectable partition size and file system type
v Support for Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE server operating systems
v Installs the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save
time
v Creates a reuseable response file that can be used with similarly configured
Lenovo servers to make future installations even faster.
Before you use the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD
Functionality and supported operating systems can vary with different versions of
the EasyStartup program. To learn more about the version you have, do the
following:
1. Insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD and restart the server.
2. Advance to the Home screen.
3. Click Compatability notes. The compatability notes provide detailed information
about the operating systems and server configurations supported by that version
of the EasyStartup program.
4. Click User Guide. The User Guide provides an overview of the various
functions provided by that version of the EasyStartup program.
Before using the EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure
any external storage devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.
Configuring RAID
The RAID configuration feature that is part of the EasyStartup program enables you
to view and change RAID settings for supported RAID controllers. Through this
feature, you have the ability to select one RAID level for each installed controller,
and the program automatically will use the discs currently attached to the controller
to support that RAID level.
If you have a need to assign a primary and secondary RAID on the same controller
and assign some of your discs to the primary RAID and some to the secondary
RAID, you can use either of the following methods:
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Manually remove the drives that you do not want included in your array
before you configure your RAID controller through the EasyStartup
program.
This method enables you to use the EasyStartup program to configure your RAID
controller and install the operating system. After the operating system is installed,
reinstall the drives and use the RAID configuration utility provided in the firmware
to configure the secondary RAID.
v Configure the controller using the RAID configuration utility provided in the
firmware before you use the EasyStartup program.
For details, see “Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program” on page 260.
After your RAID controller is configured, start the EasyStartup program and install
your operating system.
EasyStartup overview
The EasyStartup program requires a supported Lenovo server with an enabled,
startable (bootable) DVD drive. In addition to the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD,
you also must have the operating-system installation CD or DVD and the product
key or installation number for the operating system (if provided).
The EasyStartup program performs the following tasks:
v Detects installed hardware devices
v Guides you through the process of one or more RAID controllers and optionally
saves the settings in a RAID response file
v Guides you through the process of creating a response file for the unattended
installation of the operating system
v Enables you to create scripts or commands that run at the end of the operating
system installation process
v Facilitates the installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage products and
DVD-burning software (Windows installations only)
v Prepares the hard disk for installation
v Prompts you to insert the operating-system installation disc
v Initiates an unattended installation of the operating system and device drivers
Setup and configuration
When you start the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD, you will be prompted for the
following:
v Select the language in which you want to view the program.
v Select the language of the keyboard you will be using with the program.
Note: The following language keyboards are supported: English, French, German,
Spanish, Japanese, Korean, Turkish, Italian, and Dutch.
You will then see one or more reminders about storage devices, and then you will
be presented with the Lenovo License Agreement. Read the license agreement
carefully. You must agree with terms in order to continue.
After agreeing to the license agreement, you will be given the following choices:
v Continue to the main program interface
v Use a shortcut to install an operating system based a response file that you
previously created using the EasyStartup program
v Use a short cut to configure RAID controllers based on a RAID response file that
you previously created using the EasyStartup program
264 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you continue to the main program interface, you will have the following selectable
options:
v Compatibility notes: This selection provides information about the operating
systems and server configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup
program.
v User Guide: This selection provides information about the features provided by
that version of the EasyStartup program.
v Hardware list: This selection displays a list of hardware devices detected by the
EasyStartup program.
v Configure RAID: This selection enables you to view the current RAID
configuration for each installed RAID controller and make changes if needed.
v Install operating system: This selection displays a series of choices and
prompts to collect information required for installation, prepares the hard disk for
installation, and then initiates the installation process using the user-provided
operating-system installation CD or DVD.
v About: This selection displays version information and legal notices.
Typical operating system installation
When you select Install operating system, you will be prompted for information
required for the installation. The prompts vary depending on the operating system
selected. This section describes the tasks associated with a typical Windows Server
operating system installation. Each task must be completed before moving to the
next task.
Note: Ensure that your RAID controller is correctly configured before you select an
operating system to install.
v Select operating system: This task enables you to select the operating system
that you will be installing.
v Select disk: This task enables you to select the disk where you want to install
the operating system.
Note: The disk that you select must be set as the boot disk in UEFI.
v Partitions options: This task enables you to choose whether you want to
repartition the selected drive or use an existing partition.
v Partition settings: This task enables you to choose the file system type and
define the partition size.
v Installation settings: This task prompts you for user and system settings, the
operating system product key, and the administrator password.
v Network settings: This task prompts you for domain and workgroup settings,
Ethernet controller type, IP address settings, DNS settings, and WINS address
settings.
v Install applications: This task enables you to run custom commands or scripts
at the end of the installation process. It also facilitates the installation of
DVD-burning software and install ThinkServer EasyManage software products.
v Install Windows components: This task enables you to install optional
Windows components such as IIS, ASP.NET, and SNMP.
v Confirm settings: This task enables you to review all of the information you
provided.
v
Save response file: This task gives you the option of saving the information on
a diskette or USB device as a response file for future installations on similarly
configured Lenovo servers.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Start installation: This task starts the actual installation process. First, the disk
is prepared using the disk and partition information you specified. Then you are
prompted to insert the operating system disk, and the operating system is
installed using the information that you specified.
Installing your operating system without using EasyStartup
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
EasyStartup program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the Lenovo
Support Web site:
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers
and Storage from the Select your product list.
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
4. Select the operating system that you want from the Operating system list, and
click Continue.
5. Click Operating system installation to download instructions to install the
operating system.
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program
The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You
can use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize
where the network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and
disable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup Utility.
To enable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program, do the following:
1. From the Setup Utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press
Enter.
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard devices and press Enter.
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.
4. Select Enable and press Enter.
5. Exit to the main menu and select Save Settings.
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support auto-negotiation,
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and
automatically operate at that rate and mode.
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. For
device drivers and information about configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the
Broadcom NetXtreme II Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the server.
266 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Updating the firmware
The firmware in the server is periodically updated and is available for download on
latest level of firmware, such as unified extensible firmware interface (UEFI) code,
vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor firmware.
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
server with the latest version of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device
or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD image.
v UEFI code is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the baseboard management controller on the
system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS controller.
v SAS firmware is stored in ROM on the integrated RAID controller on the system
board.
v Major components contain vital product data (VPD) code. You can select to
update the VPD code during the UEFI code update procedure.
The following items are downloadable at http://www.lenovo.com/support:
v Diagnostic programs
v IMM firmware
v Ethernet firmware
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater is a software application that enables
you to maintain your system firmware up to date and helps you avoid unnecessary
outages. Firmware Updater updates the server firmware in two steps, by updating
system and adapter firmware and updating hard disk drive (HDD) firmware.
To update your system, first go the Lenovo Support Web site and obtain the ISO
file.
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers
and Storage from the Select your product list.
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200x, and click Continue.
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.
5. Download the ThinkServer firmware update media ISO file.
6. Burn the ISO image to CD or DVD.
7. Insert the media in the server CD/DVD drive, and boot the server to that drive.
8. After DOS starts, the master application starts automatically. Hardware detection
runs, and a list of applicable firmware updates is displayed.
9. Select the firmware updates that you want to install.
Before distributing the firmware update to other servers, ensure that your server can
restart successfully without encountering hardware problems.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the backup server firmware
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a
secondary copy of server firmware that you update only during the process of
updating server firmware. If the primary copy of the server firmware becomes
damaged, use this backup copy.
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the
UEFI boot recovery J29 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the UEFI boot recovery
J29 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).
Using the Integrated Management Module
The Integrated Management Module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when IMM Premium is
installed) remote presence function in a single chip.
The IMM supports the following basic system management features:
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, power supply failure, and power backplane failure.
v LED indicators to report errors that occur with fans, power supplies,
microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors (EasyLED Diagnostics
LEDs)
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) will
disable a failing DIMM that is detected during POST IMM will light the associated
system-error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v System-event log (SEL)
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash (IMM firmware updates)
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR)
v A virtual media key which enables full system management support (remote
video, remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage)
v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure restart in a two-microprocessor
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error
v NMI detection and reporting
v SMI handling
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when (1) POST is not complete or (2) the OS
hangs and the OS Watchdog Timer times-out. The IMM might be configured to
watch for OS Watchdog Timer and reboot the system after timeout, if the ASR
feature is enabled. Otherwise, IMM allows the administrator to generate an NMI
by pressing an NMI button on the system board for OS memory dump. ASR is
supported by IPMI.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V 2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support
v Serial redirect
v Serial Over LAN (SOL)
v Query power supply input power
v PECI 2 support
268 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v Power/Reset control (power-on, hard and soft shut down, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control)
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail)
v Operating system failure blue screen capture
v Command line interface
v Configuration save and restore
v PCI configuration data
v Boot sequence manipulation
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file
as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM). These integrated functions allow you to
remotely mount or unmount drives or images on the client system as well as
accessing the Web interface.
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are
available for use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a
virtual drive
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.
Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access
To access the Web interface and use the remote presence feature, you need the IP
address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address through the Setup Utility.
To locate the IP address, do the following:
1. Turn on the server.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to access the full Setup Utility menu.
3. From the Setup Utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup Utility.
Logging on to the Web interface
To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, do the
following:
1. Open a Web browser and in the Address or URL field, type the IP address or
host name of the IMM to which you want to connect.
Notes:
a. If you are logging in to the IMM for the first time after installation, the IMM
defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM uses the default
static IP address 192.168.70.125.
b. You can obtain the DHCP-assigned IP address or the static IP address from
the server UEFI or from your network administrator.
The Login page is displayed.
2. Type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM for the first time,
you can obtain the user name and password from your system administrator. All
login attempts are documented in the event log. A welcome page opens in the
browser.
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not the letter O). You have read/write
access. For enhanced security, change this default password during the initial
configuration.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM will log you off the Web interface if your browser is inactive
for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The browser opens the System Status
page, which displays the server status and the server health summary.
Advanced Settings Utility program
The Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup Utility
for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify
UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to
access the Setup Utility.
You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.
270 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software
You can install the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server program from the
ThinkServer EasyManage CD or you can download and install the program from
http://www.lenovo.com/support. After one instance of the ThinkServer EasyManage
Core Server has been installed, you can use the ThinkServer EasyManage Agent
installer to install the agent on other servers and clients on the network.
Also, the ThinkServer EasyStartup™ program provides an option to either install the
ThinkServer EasyManage Agent as part of the operating system installation process
or install a desktop icon to assist with the installation of the ThinkServer
EasyManage Core Server after the operating system has been installed.
Installation requirements
Before installing ThinkServer EasyManage software on your server, your
environment must meet the following requirements:
v Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 is installed on the
server where you intend to install the Core Server.
v The original Windows Server operating system installation CDs are available in
case files are needed while installing the prerequisites.
v The server has Internet access to obtain prerequisites and to activate the
software after the installation is complete.
v The server has a static IP address.
v The server is not a domain controller. However, it is recommended to have the
server join a domain.
v The account that you use to log in and to install the Core Server has
Administrator privileges on the server with full read/write access. Ideally, this
account is also a Domain Administrator account. This account will be used to
create the initial administrator-level account used to log in to the ThinkServer
EasyManage console.
v Any previous agent from EasyManage or LANDesk must be removed prior to
installing the Core Server and Management Console.
Installation order
The order in which you install the operating system and Windows Components is
critical to install ThinkServer EasyManage software successfully. To ensure a clean,
working installation of ThinkServer EasyManage software, use the following
installation order:
1. Install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32-bit
with the latest Service Pack.
3. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.
4. (For Windows Server 2003 only) Download Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
Service Pack 1 or newer from the following Web site: http://www.microsoft.com/
&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. (For both Windows Server 2003 and 2008) Download Microsoft Web Services
Enhancement 2.0 Service Pack 3 (LANDesk Process Manager only) from the
following Web site: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/
&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.
Note: This specific version is required.
6. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.
7. Launch the EasyManage installation.
8. After ThinkServer EasyManage is installed, enable Security and Patch Manager
to obtain the LANDesk 8.8 Software Updates. In the console application, click
Help -> LANDesk -> Security Updates for a guide to configuring Security and
Patch Manager.
9. Install Adobe® Flash Player 9 if you plan to use the Management Console
functions from the same server on which the Core Server is installed. You can
obtain Adobe Flash Player 9 from the Adobe Web site:
Installing Windows 2003 components on the Core Server
To install IIS, ASP.Net, and SNMP on the Core Server, do the following procedure:
1. In the Windows Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
2. In the toolbar on the left, click Add/Remove Windows Components to launch
the Windows Components Wizard.
3. Select from the Components list:
v When installing IIS and ASP.NET, click Application Server; then, click
Details.
v When installing SNMP, click Management and Monitoring Tools; then, click
Details.
4. Select the component that you want to install:
v When installing IIS, select Internet Information Services (IIS); then, click
OK.
v When installing ASP.NET, select ASP.NET; then, click OK.
v When installing SNMP, select Simple Network Management Protocol; then,
click OK.
5. Click Next to continue the wizard.
6. If prompted, insert the original Windows operating system CD. If the autorun
launches when you insert the CD, close it. The Windows Components Wizard
will automatically detect and install the necessary files.
7. Click Finish.
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components
To install the Windows Server 2008 32-bit components necessary for a ThinkServer
EasyManage core server installation, complete the steps in this section.
Installing Web Server Role (IIS)
To install the Web Server Role (IIS), do the following:
1. Click Start -> Server Manager.
2. Under Roles Summary, click Add Roles. The Add Roles wizard appears.
3. Click Next.
272 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Select the checkbox next to Web Server (IIS). A dialog box displays the
additional features that are required.
5. Click Add Required Features, then click Next. In the list of additional role
services that can be installed, ensure that the follow are checked:
v HTTP Redirection
v Static Content
v ASP.NET
v ASP
v CGI
v Server Side Includes
v Windows Authentication
v IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility
Note: When you select ASP.Net or ASP, a dialog box displays the additional
role services required. Click Add Required Role Services.
6. Click Install.
Note: If IIS is already installed and certain Role Services are still required,
expand Roles in the tree view on the left in Server Manager and click on Web
Server (IIS), then click on Add Role Services. Select the necessary role
services and click Install.
Installing Microsoft SNMP services
To install Microsoft SNMP services, do the following:
1. Click Add Features in the Features Summary section on the main page of
Server Manager.
2. Select the SNMP Services checkbox.
3. Click Next, then Install.
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent
If the Core Server has LANDesk agents on it from a previous Management Suite
release, it will fail the autorun prerequisite check. You must remove the old agents
by running uninstallwinclient.exe from the \Program Files\LANDesk\
ManagementSuite folder.
Chapter 9. Configuring the server 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from
Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for
additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo products, what to do if you
experience a problem with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is
necessary.
Before you call
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by using the information
available on the Lenovo support site or by following the troubleshooting procedures
that Lenovo provides in the documentation that is provided with your Lenovo
product. The documentation that comes with Lenovo systems also describes the
diagnostic tests that you can perform. Most systems, operating systems, and
programs come with documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and
explanations of error messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem,
see the documentation for the operating system or program.
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web
On the World Wide Web, the Lenovo Web site has up-to-date information about
Lenovo systems, optional devices, services, and support. For general information
about Lenovo products or to purchase Lenovo products, go to
http://www.lenovo.com. For support on Lenovo products, go to
Calling for service
During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through
the Customer Support Center.
These services are available during the warranty period:
v Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with
determining a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the
problem.
v Hardware repair - If the problem is caused by hardware under warranty, trained
service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service.
v Engineering Change management - There might be changes that are required
after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller will make selected
Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your hardware.
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These items are not covered by the warranty:
v Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or
non-warranted Lenovo parts
v Identification of software problem sources
v Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade
v Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers
v Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)
v Installation and maintenance of application programs
Refer to the safety and warranty information that is provided with your computer for
a complete explanation of warranty terms. You must retain your proof of purchase
to obtain warranty service.
For a list of service and support phone numbers for your country or region, go to
and warranty information provided with your computer.
Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your
country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing
representative.
If possible, be at your computer when you call. Have the following information
available:
v Machine type and model
v Serial numbers of our hardware products
v Description of the problem
v Exact working of any error messages
v Hardware and software configuration information
Using other services
If you travel with a Lenovo notebook computer or relocate your computer to a
country where your desktop, notebook, or server machine type is sold, your
computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service, which automatically
entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will
be performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service.
Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be
available in all countries. International Warranty Service is delivered through the
method of service (such as depot, carry-in, or on-site service) that is provided in the
servicing country. Service centers in certain countries might not be able to service
all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions
might apply at the time of service.
To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service
and to view a list of the countries where service is available, go to
screen.
For technical assistance with the installation of, or questions related to, Service
Packs for your preinstalled Microsoft® Windows product, refer to the Microsoft
Product Support Services Web site at http://www.support.microsoft.com/directory/,
or you can contact the Customer Support Center. Some fees might apply.
276 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purchasing additional services
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as
support for hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup
and configuration; upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom
installations. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region.
For more information about these services, go to the Lenovo Web site at
Lenovo product service
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B. Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document
in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any other product, program, or service.
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this
statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or
other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to
persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change
Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate
as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights
of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained
in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in
other operating environments may vary.
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries,
or both:
Lenovo
Lenovo logo
ThinkServer
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
in the United States, other countries, or both:
IBM
ServeRAID™
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States, other countries, or both.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States
and other countries.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.
Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for
1 073 741 824 bytes.
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives that are available from Lenovo.
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an
optional memory module.
280 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lenovo makes no representation or warranties regarding non-Lenovo products and
services, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered and warranted solely by
third parties.
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include
user manuals or all program functionality.
Product recycling and disposal
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national
regulations. Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a
variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT
products. Information on Lenovo product recycling offerings can be found on
Lenovo’s Internet site at
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la
normativa nacional o local aplicable. Lenovo recomienda a los propietarios de
equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus
equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. Lenovo dispone de una serie de
programas y servicios de devolución de productos, a fin de ayudar a los
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de Lenovo en el sitio web
de Lenovo
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end
of life per this Directive.
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne
et à la Norvège.
Appendix B. Notices 281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de
Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers
l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin
de vie.
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and
treatment, contact your local Lenovo representative.
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of
Hazardous Substances
Meets requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances In Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(EEE).
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın
“Elektrik ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin
Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)”
direktiflerine uygundur.
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Recycling statements for Japan
282 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery return program
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual
or service manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or
disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For
information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go to
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment or contact your local waste disposal
facility.
For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.
For the European Union:
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European
Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux
directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la
marche à suivre en vigueue dans l'Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses
Appendix B. Notices 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators
are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers
for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.
For California:
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations
Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate
Materials. This product/part may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which
contains a perchlorate substance.
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according
to clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.
Electronic emission notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
284 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement
Notice to Customers
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect
connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Germany Class A compliance statement
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen
Verträglichkeit
Appendix B. Notices 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG
(früher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung
für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung
der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern
ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Betriebsmittein
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
von Betriebsmitteln” EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Geräten”). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie
2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli
2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten),
bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der
Klasse A.
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland)
GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen.”
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört
sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und
Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation
betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4).
Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der
entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in
den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
286 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
diagnostic
error symptoms (continued)
errors
DIMM
extender card
DIMMs
F
fan
DSA
DVD
DVD drive
firmware
E
front adapter-retention bracket
EasyLED diagnostics
EasyStartup
error codes and messages
FRUs, installing
error symptoms
FRUs, removing
290 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installing (continued)
G
H
J
hard disk drive
K
L
LEDs
heat-sink retention module
I
IMM
installing
LEDs, EasyLED
Index 291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
left-side cover
open
opening
logs
operator information panel
LSI Configuration Utility
M
P
password
memory mirroring
PCI
memory module
PCI slots
POST
messages
power
microprocessor retention module
power-on password
power-supply
power-supply cage
N
problems
network operating system (NOS) installation
notices
O
online
292 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
problems (continued)
service
Setup Utility
stabilizing feet
start here
starting
system
system board
R
rear adapter retention bracket
recovering
remote presence feature
removing
T
tape drive
turning
S
serial
Index 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
updating
USB
USB cable and EasyLED panel
using
V
video
voltage regulator module
VRM
W
Web interface
Web site
294 ThinkServer TD200x Types 3719, 3821, 3822, and 3823: Hardware Maintenance Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part Number: XXXXXX
Printed in USA
(1P) P/N: XXXXXX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Learning Resources Games LER 3041 User Manual
LG Electronics Flat Panel Television OLED55B6P User Manual
Lochinvar Water Heater CH CF 991 2071 User Manual
Magic Chef Refrigerator MCBR460S User Manual
Magnavox DVD VCR Combo MDV 530 VR User Manual
Magnavox Portable CD Player MPC270 User Manual
Makita Router RP2300FC User Manual
Marshall electronic Computer Monitor V R1042DP DVI User Manual
Maytag Clothes Dryer MED9700SQ User Manual
Micro Innovations Switch NB370CP User Manual